RX-V1600 - Yamaha Corporation

RX-V1600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 26, 2005 4:34 PM
U
RX-V1600
RX-V1600
AV Receiver
© 2005
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
All rights reserved.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Printed in Malaysia
WF99900
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
10
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
•
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
i
11
Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may
cause the product and cart combination to
overturn.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
d)
20
21
22
23
If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f)
When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance - this indicates a need for service.
Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24
Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
ii
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main
room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power
plug from the AC wall outlet.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is
often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group
recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
iii
CONTENTS
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 4
Handling the remote control ...................................... 5
Opening and closing the front panel door.................. 5
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 6
PREPARATION
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 14
Introduction.............................................................. 32
Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 32
Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 33
BASIC OPERATION
Basic operations....................................................... 36
Additional operations............................................... 38
RECORDING ....................................................... 45
FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 46
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ............... 52
What is XM Satellite Radio? ................................... 52
XM Satellite Radio connections .............................. 52
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 53
Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 54
Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode................... 55
Using XM Satellite Radio search modes ................. 56
Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............ 59
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information .......................................................... 60
For movie/video sources.......................................... 64
For music sources .................................................... 66
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................67
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
SPEAKER LAYOUTS......................................71
ADVANCED OPERATION
MANUAL SETUP.................................................75
Using MANUAL SETUP ........................................ 77
Using BASIC MENU .............................................. 78
Using SOUND MENU ............................................ 81
Using INPUT MENU .............................................. 83
Using OPTION MENU ........................................... 85
ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................89
Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 89
Adjusting speaker levels .......................................... 89
ADVANCED SETUP ............................................90
Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................... 90
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................92
Control area ............................................................. 92
Controlling each component.................................... 93
Setting remote control codes ................................... 94
Using LEARN ......................................................... 96
Using RE-NAME .................................................... 98
Using MACRO ........................................................ 99
Using CLEAR........................................................ 101
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 .................................................104
Connecting the Zone 2 and
Zone 3 components ........................................... 104
Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3.................................... 105
Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3.............................. 106
Using the control mode of
Zone 2 and Zone 3............................................. 107
HDMI ...................................................................108
What is HDMI? ..................................................... 108
Setting the HDMI parameters................................ 109
Basic HDMI operations ......................................... 109
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 46
Manual tuning.......................................................... 47
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 47
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 49
Selecting preset stations........................................... 50
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 51
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................64
ADVANCED
OPERATION
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 36
What is a sound field? ............................................. 62
Changing parameter settings ................................... 62
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
AUTO SETUP....................................................... 32
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......62
BASIC
OPERATION
Before connecting speakers ..................................... 14
Connecting speakers ................................................ 15
Using bi-wire and bi-AMP connections .................. 19
Information on cables and jacks
used for connections ............................................ 20
Connecting HDMI components............................... 23
Connecting video components................................. 24
Connecting audio components................................. 27
Connecting the antennas .......................................... 29
Connecting the power cable..................................... 30
Turning on and off this unit ..................................... 30
Setting the speaker impedance................................. 31
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
PREPARATION
Front panel ................................................................. 6
Remote control........................................................... 8
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................. 10
Front panel display .................................................. 11
Rear panel ................................................................ 13
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................110
GLOSSARY.........................................................117
Audio information ................................................. 117
Video information.................................................. 119
Sound field program information .......................... 119
Parametric equalizer information .......................... 120
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................121
1
FEATURES
FEATURES
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS Output Power
(0.04% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω)
Front: 120 W + 120 W
Center: 120 W
Surround: 120 W + 120 W
Surround Back: 120 W + 120 W
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or
high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital
audio
◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion
(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video →
HDMI digital video) capability for monitor out
Sound field features
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of
sound fields
◆ THX Select2
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1,
DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic x decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA™
Other features
◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to
optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video
system
◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete
multi-channel input
◆ Short message function
◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and
PCM sources
◆ S-video input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability
◆ Analog video I/P conversion from 480i to 480p
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening mode
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and
learning/macro capability
◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random access preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)
◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc.
In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
2
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
The THX logo is a trademark of THX Ltd. which may be
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
© 2005 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
GETTING STARTED
GETTING STARTED
INTRODUCTION
Supplied accessories
Please check that you received all of the following parts.
Remote control
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
TV
AV
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control
POWER
XM
SELECT
TUNER
CD
CD-R
2
3
1
DTV
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
SOURCE
TV MUTE
LEVEL
TV INPUT
TV
SET MENU
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
4
5
6
ENT
DVR/VCR2
DVD
V-AUX
7
8
9
0
+
+
PRESET
VOLUME
NIGHT
Batteries (x6)
(AAA, R03)
–
–
A/B/C/D/E
MUTE
AUDIO
ENTER
PHONO
VCR1
MUTE
PRESET/CH
TITLE
STANDBY
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
A-E/CAT.
ON SCREEN
A-E/CAT.
k
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
EFFECT
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
k
k
RETURN
XM MEMORY
k
PRESET
5
6
1
MEMORY 2
0
7
CAT.
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
ID1 ID2
9
DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
ALL
NUMBER
8
A SPEAKERS B
+10
ENT.
REC
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RE–NAME
Power cable
Speaker terminal
wrench
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
Optimizer microphone
3
GETTING STARTED
Installing batteries in the remote controls
Notes
• Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not
flash, or its light or display window become dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these
different types of batteries may have the same shape and color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
■ Installing batteries
■ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control
2
2
1
1
3
3
1
Press the
part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2
Insert four supplied batteries
(AAA, R03) according to the polarity
markings on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3
Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the remote control code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
4
1
Press the
part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2
Insert two supplied batteries (AAA, R03)
according to the polarity markings (+ and –)
on the inside of the battery compartment.
3
Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
GETTING STARTED
Handling the remote control
INTRODUCTION
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation.
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
MASTER
ON
EFFECT
INPUT
SPEAKERS
ON/OFF
YPAO
OPTIMIZER
MIC
B
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
30
30
SYSTEM
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
A
STANDBY
XM
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
CD
MULTI CH IN
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
CD-R
DVD
SELECT
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOL
SOURCE
–
–
–
TV MUTE
LEVEL
TV INPUT
TV
MUTE
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
PURE DIRECT
MENU
SRCH MODE
BAND
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
ON SCREEN
RETURN
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
XM MEMORY
STEREO
1
EFFECT
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
2
THX
MOVIE
3
STANDARD
5
4
SELECT
6
EXTD SUR.
7
8
A SPEAKERS B
9
0
+10
ENT.
REC
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RE–NAME
Notes
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Opening and closing the front panel door
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the
panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls.
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
5
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
Note
The XM Satellite Radio controls (SEARCH MODE, CATEGORY, PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h, MEMORY and DISPLAY) are only
applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when XM is selected as the input source. For details, see “Front panel
functions” on page 53.
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
8
9 0 A B
C D E
F
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
ON/OFF
MASTER
ON
EFFECT
INPUT
YPAO
B
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
(U.S.A. model)
G H
I
1 MASTER ON/OFF
Press inward to the ON position.
• Turns on this unit.
• Turns on the main room.
• Sets Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode.
Press again to release it outward to the OFF position.
• Turns off this unit.
• Turns off the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3.
See page 30 for details.
2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
Turns on this unit only or sets it to the standby mode.
y
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small quantity of
power.
Notes
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 6 to 7 second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
3 INPUT selector
Selects the desired input source.
6
J
KL
M
4 AUDIO SELECT
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
between AUTO, HDMI, COAX/OPT and ANALOG when
one component is connected to two or more input jacks on
the rear panel (see page 43).
5 MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the input source connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT
source takes priority over the input source selected with
the INPUT selector (or the input selector buttons on the
remote control).
6 A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when
TUNER is selected as the input source (see page 50).
7 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
Selects the preset station number (1 to 8) when TUNER is
selected as the input source and the colon (:) is displayed
next to the band indication in the front panel display.
Selects the tuning frequency when TUNER is selected as
the input source and the colon (:) is not displayed in the
front panel display.
See pages 46 to 51 for details.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
0 FM/AM
Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when TUNER is
selected as the input source (see page 46).
Note
The frequency of the previously received station is automatically
recalled.
A MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a station in the memory when TUNER is selected
as the input source. Hold down for more than 3 seconds to
start automatic preset tuning (see page 47).
B TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L), DISPLAY
Switches the tuning mode between automatic (the AUTO
indicator is turned on) and manual (the AUTO indicator is
turned off) when TUNER is selected as the input source.
C STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Turns the sound field programs on or off. When
STRAIGHT is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel input
signals are output directly from the respective speakers
without effect processing.
D Remote control sensor
Receives infrared signals from the remote control.
E TONE CONTROL
Use to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front
left and right and center channels (see page 38).
F PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode (see page 41).
Notes
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to 2channel stereo (front left and right channels).
J VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from an external source such
as a game console. To reproduce source signals at these
jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.
K MULTI ZONE buttons
ZONE 2 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode.
See page 30 for details.
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
ZONE 3 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode.
See page 30 for details.
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
ZONE CONTROL
Switches the zone you want to control between the
main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 106).
After you press ZONE CONTROL, the indicator for
the currently selected zone flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds. While the
indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation.
Note
L PROGRAM selector
Use to select sound field programs or adjust the balance of
bass and treble in conjunction with TONE CONTROL.
The indicator around the button lights up when the unit is in the
PURE DIRECT mode.
M VOLUME
Controls the volume level of all audio channels.
G OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied optimizer microphone to run
AUTO SETUP (see page 32).
This does not affect the OUT (REC) level.
Note
H SPEAKERS A/B
Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each
time the corresponding button is pressed.
7
INTRODUCTION
9 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
between selecting preset station numbers and tuning when
TUNER is selected as the input source (see pages 46 to
51).
I
PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Remote control
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. Set AMP/
SOURCE/TV to AMP to operate this unit. To operate
other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL
FEATURES” on page 92.
Note
The XM Satellite Radio controls (XM, XM MEMORY, SRCH
MODE, DISPLAY, cursor buttons k / n / l / h, numeric
buttons and ENT.) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and
are operational only when XM is selected as the input source. For
details, see “Remote control functions” on page 53.
1
2
3
A
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
TV
AV
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
4
SELECT
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
SOURCE
TV MUTE
5
LEVEL
TV INPUT
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
NIGHT
6
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
7
ON SCREEN
RETURN
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
EFFECT
XM MEMORY
8
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
MOVIE
A SPEAKERS B
+10
MODE
F
I
PURE DIRECT
SET MENU
TITLE
E
TV
MUTE
PRESET/CH
B
C
D
ENT.
O
PTY SEEK START
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 Transmission indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press
TUNER to select TUNER as the input source.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press XM
to select XM as the input source.
4 Display window
Shows the name of the selected input source that you can
control.
5 LEVEL, BAND
Selects the speaker you want to adjust the speaker output
level for when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP
(see pages 89).
Switches the reception band between FM and AM when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is
selected as the input source.
6 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER
Selects and adjusts the DSP program parameters or OSD
menu items when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.
Press l / h to select a preset station group (A to E) and
k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is
selected as the input source.
7 RETURN
Returns to the upper or the previous directory in the OSD
menu.
8 Sound field program / numeric buttons
Select sound field programs when AMP/SOURCE/TV is
set to AMP.
Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in the multichannel format (see page 40).
Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1
channel playback of multi-channel software (see page 39).
Use numbers 1 to 8 to select preset stations when AMP/
SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is selected
as the input source.
9 MACRO ON/OFF
Turns on or off the macro function (see page 100).
REC
DISC SKIP
9
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
0
(U.S.A. model)
8
RE–NAME
P
Q
R
0 MACRO
Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a
single button (see page 99).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
A STANDBY
Sets this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode (see
page 30).
J PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode (see page 41).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
L NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 41).
B POWER
Turns on this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 30).
M ON SCREEN
Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD)
that appears on your monitor (see page 89).
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
C AUDIO SEL
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
between AUTO, HDMI, COAX/OPT and ANALOG when
one component is connected to two or more input jacks on
the rear panel (see page 43).
D SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
E MULTI CH IN
Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external
decoder, etc.
F SELECT k / n
Selects another input source that you can control
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons.
G VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
N STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Switches the sound field programs off or on. When
STRAIGHT is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel input
signals are output directly from their respective speakers
without effect processing.
O SPEAKERS A/B
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each
time the corresponding button is pressed.
P RE-NAME
Changes the name of the input source in the display
window (see page 98).
Q CLEAR
Clears remote control codes or functions acquired from
the learn, macro and rename features (see page 101).
R LEARN
Programs remote control codes or functions from other
remote controls (see page 96).
H AMP/SOURCE/TV
Selects the component you want to control with the
remote control.
AMP
Set to this position to operate this unit.
SOURCE
Set to this position to operate the component selected with
an input selector button.
TV
Set to this position to operate the television assigned to
either DTV or PHONO.
Note
If televisions are assigned to both DTV and PHONO, the one
assigned to DTV takes priority and gets operated when AMP/
SOURCE/TV is set to TV.
y
To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 94.
I MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to
the previous volume level.
9
INTRODUCTION
Note
K SET MENU
Enters or exits the SET MENU mode.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control
This section describes the function of each control on the
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control used to control Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
1 Input selector buttons
Select the desired input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 and
change the control area.
Note
2 PRESET +/–
Selects the preset station number (1 to 8) when TUNER is
selected as the input source or Zone 2 or Zone 3.
The XM Satellite Radio controls (XM, DISPLAY, PRESET,
ALL, CAT., numeric buttons, NUMBER, cursor buttons
k / n / l / h and ENT) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model
and are operational only when XM is selected as the input source.
For details, see “Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control functions” on
page 54.
POWER
XM
5
1
2
3
TUNER
CD
CD-R
1
2
3
DTV
STANDBY
6
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
5
6
ENT
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
V-AUX
7
8
9
0
+
+
PRESET
VOLUME
–
–
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
8
MUTE
k
k
A-E/CAT.
DISPLAY
PRESET
CAT.
PRESET/CH
k
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
ID1 ID2
4
5 POWER
Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Note
7
A/B/C/D/E
ALL
4 ID1/ID2 switch
Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2
(see page 95).
PHONO
4
k
3 A/B/C/D/E
Selects the preset station group (A to E) when TUNER is
selected as the input source or Zone 2 or Zone 3.
NUMBER
9
6 STANDBY
Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode.
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
7 VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level or Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
8 MUTE
Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Press again to restore the audio output to the previous
volume level.
(U.S.A. model)
10
9 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch
Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that
of Zone 3.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel display
1 2 3
4
V-AUX
YPAO HiFi DSP
SP
AB
SILENT
CINEMA
VIRTUAL
5
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
6
MD/TAPE
CD-R
B CD E FG
DSD
PCM
HI
1 YPAO indicator
Lights up when the AUTO SETUP procedure is in
progress and when the AUTO SETUP speaker settings are
used without any modifications.
2 HDMI indicator
Lights up when HDMI components are assigned to HDMI
IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks and they are recognized by this
unit (see page 83).
Turns off when no HDMI component is assigned to the
either HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack or when no HDMI
component is recognized by this unit although they are
assigned to the HDMI IN jacks (see page 83).
See page 108 for details.
3 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program.
4 Decoder indicators
When any of the decoders of this unit operate, the
respective indicator lights up.
5 Input source indicators
Light up when the corresponding input source is selected.
6 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the volume level.
7 MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on.
8 AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.
9 STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.
0 TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.
PHONO
890A
TUNER
XM
STEREO TUNED
AUTO MEMORY
dB
VOLUME MUTE ZONE2
ZONE3
96/24
NIGHT
L C R
SLEEP
LFE SL SB SR
DIGITAL
PL x CS
EX
DISCRETE 96
MATRIX 24
CD
7
J
KL
M
NO P
A MEMORY indicator
Flashes to indicate that a station can be stored.
B Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
C SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 38).
D SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
Both indicators light up when both sets of front speakers
are selected or when bi-wiring.
E VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active
(see page 43).
F Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Left surround
DSP sound field
Right surround
DSP sound field
Surround/surround back DSP sound field
G HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program.
H PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
I DSD indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (direct
stream digital) digital audio signals.
J Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
11
INTRODUCTION
Note
The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. model.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
K 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
L LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.
M Input channel and speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
L C R
SL SB SR
Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Light up according to the number of presence and
surround back speakers set for PRESENCE SP
(see page 79) and SB L/R SP (see page 79) in
MANUAL SETUP when TEST TONE in MANUAL
SETUP is set to ON (see page 81).
y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back
speakers automatically by running AUTO SETUP
(see page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for
PRESENCE SP (see page 79) and SB L/R SP (see page 79)
in MANUAL SETUP.
N NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode.
O SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators
Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on.
12
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Rear panel
2
3
DIGITAL INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
COAXIAL
4
VIDEO
S VIDEO
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
AUDIO
5
1
DVD
DVR/
VCR 2
MD/TAPE
OPTICAL
CD
2
REMOTE
WRENCH
HOLDER
DTV
DTV
R
IN
+
AM ANT
GND
AC IN
–
OUT
SPEAKERS
A
–
+
B
–
+
L
IN
CBL/
SAT
DVD
OUT
CD-R
FRONT
+
–
IN
RS-232C
IN 1
9
(REC)
(PLAY)
CBL/
SAT
DTV
8
TUNER
FM ANT
75Ω
UNBAL.
+12V 15mA MAX.
IN
DVD
CD
7
CONTROL OUT
L
(PLAY)
DVD
6
INTRODUCTION
1
CENTER
–
+
OUT
(REC)
VCR 1
MONITOR OUT
CBL/SAT
OUT
MD/TAPE
IN
GND
CD
PHONO
FRONT
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
PRE OUT
R
IN 2
DVR/VCR 2
+
SURROUND/ZONE 2(3)
–
–
+
100W MAX.TOTAL
SWITCHED
L
L
R
SURROUND
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
AC OUTLETS
L
R
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
OUT
CD-R
L
R
ZONE
2
OUT
+
CENTER
R
+
–
–
+
L
DIGITAL OUTPUT
MONITOR OUT
XM
–
SINGLE
(SB)
ZONE
3
HDMI
R
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT
CENTER
L
SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK
PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)
G
H
MULTI CH INPUT
(U.S.A. model)
0
A
B
C
D
E F
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
See pages 24, 25 and 27 for connection information.
0 XM jack (U.S.A. model only)
See page 52 for connection information.
2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 24, 25 and 27 for details.
A HDMI IN/OUT connectors
See page 108 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 24 and 25 for connection information.
B RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only.
Consult you dealer for details.
4 Audio component jacks
See pages 24, 25 and 27 for connection information.
5 CONTROL OUT jacks
These are control expansion terminals for factory use only.
6 WRENCH HOLDER
Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when
not in use (see page 16).
C ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks
See page 104 for details.
D MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 26 for connection information.
E PRE OUT jacks
See page 28 for connection information.
7 Antenna terminals
See page 29 for connection information.
F REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
See page 104 for details.
8 AC OUTLETS
Use to supply power to your other A/V components
(see page 30).
G Speaker terminals
See page 15 for connection information.
9 AC IN
Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable
(see page 30).
H PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals
See page 17 for connection information.
13
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS
Before connecting speakers
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R*
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP,
multi-channel audio sources and THX.
* ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union).
PL
PR
C
FR
FL
30˚
SL
SR
60˚
SL
80˚
SBL
SR
SBR
More than 30 cm (12 in)
1.8 m (6 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
Surround speakers (SR and SL)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)
apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width
as the front speakers.
Subwoofer
The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active
Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only
for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,
but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and
DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so
critical, because low bass sounds are not highly
directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the
front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the
room to reduce wall reflections.
Presence speakers (PR and PL)
Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA
DSP (see page 64). These effects include sounds that
filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the
screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place
these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 – 1 m
(1 – 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly
inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.
Note
Front speakers (FR and FL)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front
face of the center speaker with the front face of your video
monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front
speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as
directly over or under it.
14
Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound
simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers
using the PRIORITY parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see
page 79).
CONNECTIONS
■ Di-pole speaker layout
Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used
for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please
place the surround and surround back speakers according
to the speaker layout below.
FL
C
FR
Connecting speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the
polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTION
SR
SBL
SBR
: Di-pole speaker
: Direction of the di-pole speaker phase
Note
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side
by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable
to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect
the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
■ Connecting to the speaker terminals
FRONT terminals
Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals.
If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of
the FRONT A or B terminals.
Note
The Canada model cannot output to two pairs of speaker systems
simultaneously.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker to these terminals.
SURROUND ZONE 2(3) terminals
Connect surround speakers to these terminals.
SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect surround back speakers to these terminals.
If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it
to the left (L) terminals.
15
PREPARATION
SL
• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker
impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 31). If you
will use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial setting for
speaker impedance.
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is
disconnected from the power source.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let
them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this
unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still
creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away
from the monitor.
CONNECTIONS
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of
insulation from each of the speaker cables.
5
Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the
supplied speaker terminal wrench.
Speaker terminal wrench
10 mm (3/8 in)
2
Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
6
3
Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker
terminal wrench.
Speaker terminal wrench
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
4
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
16
Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto
WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this
unit when not in use.
CONNECTIONS
PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) terminals
Connect presence speakers to these terminals.
■ Speaker layout
Refer to the following illustration as to where to place
each speaker in your listening room.
Note
9
You can also use these terminals to connect the Zone 2 speakers
(see page 105).
1
10
2
4
Open the tab.
1
7
3
8
Insert one bare wire into the hole of each
terminal.
3
Return the tab to secure the wire.
1
Subwoofer
2
Front right speaker
3
Front left speaker
4
Center speaker
5
Surround back right speaker
6
Surround back left speaker
7
Surround right speaker
8
Surround left speaker
9
Presence right speaker
PREPARATION
2
5
6
10 Presence left speaker
■ Connecting the banana plug
(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)
First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
Banana plug
(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)
y
You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)
speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug
connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close
the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.
17
CONNECTIONS
Front speakers (A)
Right
Left
Subwoofer with
built-in amplifier
Center
speaker
1
2
3
Front
speakers
(B)
4
(U.S.A. model)
R
+
FRONT
FRONT
–
+
–
+
–
SPEAKERS
A
–
+
B
–
+
–
+
L
CENTER
–
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
PRE OUT
R
L
L
R
L
R
SUBWOOFER
+
CENTER
R
+
–
–
+
L
–
SINGLE
(SB)
SINGLE
L
R
Right
Left
Surround speakers
PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE
8
L
R
SURROUND
7
+
5
6
Right
Left
Surround back speakers
9
10
Right
Left
Presence speakers
• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set
to prioritize either set of speakers using the PRIORITY parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 79).
• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and operate
only when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, Dolby Pro Logic x, THX Select2, THX Music, THX Games or THX Surround EX
decoder is turned on.
• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields
are selected.
18
CONNECTIONS
Using bi-wire and bi-AMP
connections
■ Conventional connection
If you want to connect your speakers as traditional
loudspeakers using the conventional connection method,
connect your speakers using the regular left and right
speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of
terminals.
+
–
A
–
+
FRONT +
–
B
–
+
R
Shorting bars
or bridges
L
Shorting bars
or bridges
This unit
+
–
A
–
+
FRONT +
–
B
–
+
R
L
This unit
■ Bi-AMP connection
The bi-AMP connection uses two amplifiers for both
speakers. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section
of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the
combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement
each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.
This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much
simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence
the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high
pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes
frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above
the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes
frequencies above its cutoff.
Notes
• Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low
pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.
• To activate the bi-AMP connections, set BI-AMP to ON in
ADVANCED SETUP (see page 91).
• To make the bi-AMP connections, use the FRONT and
SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below.
■ Bi-wire connection
The bi-wire connection separates the woofer from the
combined midrange and tweeter section. A bi-wire
compatible speaker has four binding post terminals. These
two sets of terminals allow the speaker to be split into two
independent sections. This split connects the mid and high
frequency drivers to one set of terminals and the low
frequency driver to the other pair.
Notes
R
–
+
–
A
–
+
L
–
+
L
FRONT
R
• Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low
pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.
• To use the bi-wire connections, press SPEAKERS A on the
front panel so that SP A lights up in the front panel display.
+
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK
This unit
19
PREPARATION
Some of the speakers commercially available these days
have speaker wire connections that allow bi-wiring or biamplification to enhance the performance of the speaker
system. This unit allows you to make bi-wire and bi-AMP
connections to one speaker system. Check if your speakers
support bi-wiring or bi-amplification. As these speakers
are shipped to you, you will note gold-plated shorting bars
or bridges, one connecting the two red input terminals and
the other connecting the two black input terminals.
Remove these shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to
bi-wire or bi-AMP your speakers.
CONNECTIONS
Information on cables and jacks
used for connections
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the main
power until all connections between components are
complete.
■ Cable indications
For analog signals
left analog cables
L
right analog cables
R
For digital signals
optical cables
coaxial cables
O
C
For video signals
video cables
S-video cables
For HDMI signals
20
V
S
■ Analog jacks
You can input analog signals from audio components by
connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this
unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs
to the left jacks.
■ Digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You
can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both
the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to
signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks
are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
Note
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input at the analog jacks are only output at the
analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the
digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output at the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
CONNECTIONS
■ Audio jacks
This unit has four types of audio jacks (analog audio, digital audio coaxial, digital audio optical and HDMI). Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components.
AUDIO
L
R
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals.
HDMI
DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via digital optical
cables.
PREPARATION
DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via digital coaxial
cables.
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
HDMI jacks
For HDMI digital audio signals.
■ Audio signal flow for OUT (REC)
Input
Output
OUT (REC)
HDMI
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
Digital audio
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
AUDIO
Analog audio
Through
Digital output
Analog output
Notes
• The audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks only and are not output at the
analog OUT (REC) jacks.
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be output at
the HDMI OUT jack only when HDMI SET is set to OTHER (see page 82).
• 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals except multi-channel PCM signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be
output at the DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks.
• Copy-protected 2-channel PCM signals with over 48 kHz/16 bit input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are not output at the
DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks.
21
CONNECTIONS
■ Video jacks
This unit has four types of video jacks (composite, component, S-video and HDMI). Connection depends on the
availability of input jacks on your monitor. When V CONV. is set to ON (see page 85), the analog video signals input at
the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks interchangeably. In addition, when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 85) and HDMI I/P is set to ON (see
page 86), the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be digitally upconverted and output at the HDMI OUT jack.
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color
reproduction.
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
HDMI
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in
picture reproduction.
HDMI jacks
For HDMI digital video signals.
■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
Input
HDMI
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Digital video
COMPONENT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
Analog video
VIDEO
Through
Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 85)
HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 86)
Notes
• The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i to 480p. Set CMPNT I/P to ON in
MANUAL SETUP to activate this feature (see page 85).
• The analog video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and output at the S VIDEO or VIDEO jacks cannot be converted to
480p/1080i/720p.
• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input
signals is as follows where the analog video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks have the top priority.
1. COMPONENT VIDEO
2. S VIDEO
3. VIDEO
• Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 85) and HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 86) are available
only when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 85).
22
CONNECTIONS
Connecting HDMI components
This unit has the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks for digital audio and video signal input as well as the HDMI OUT
jack for digital audio and video signal output. Connect the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit to the HDMI OUT
jack of other HDMI components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack
of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a projector).
The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack you selected using the HDMI IN menu in I/O
ASSIGNMENT (see page 83) or the INPUT selector on the front panel are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. In
addition, the audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output to speakers, headphones and the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
Digital audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks.
Some audio signals may not be output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks depending on the signal type.
The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be output
at the HDMI OUT jack. Set HDMI I/P to ON in MANUAL SETUP to activate this feature (see page 86).
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio signals being input if they are in
the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly and HDCP ERROR appears in the front panel display as if the
DVI monitors do not support the HDCP copy protection standards.
IN 1
DVD Player
HDMI out
IN 2
Cable TV or
Satellite tuner
HDMI out
HDMI in
OUT
Video
monitor
HDMI
(U.S.A. model)
23
PREPARATION
Notes
•
•
•
•
CONNECTIONS
Connecting video components
■ Connecting a DVD player
HDMI out
Optical out
Audio out
Coaxial out
DVD player
Video out
R
C
O
DIGITAL INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
COAXIAL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
R
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
L
DVD
DVD
DVD
Video
monitor
OPTICAL
DVD
Video in
IN 1
HDMI in
MONITOR OUT
IN 2
OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
MONITOR OUT
HDMI
OUTPUT
(U.S.A. model)
Note
Check the availability of jacks on your DVD player and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output. However, in case
you make an HDMI connection, you can make both audio and video connections using a single HDMI cable.
24
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting other video components
HDMI out
Optical out
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
Audio out
Video out
R
O
L
(U.S.A. model)
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
COAXIAL
DVR/
VCR 2
VIDEO
S VIDEO
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
PREPARATION
DIGITAL INPUT
L
Video
monitor
DTV
OPTICAL
CBL/
SAT
CBL/
SAT
IN
VCR 1
IN 1
OUT
CBL/SAT
IN 2
OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
HDMI
R
C
L
R
L
Audio in
Video out
Video out
DVD recorder
or VCR
Audio out
Coaxial out
HDMI in
HDMI out
Note
Check the availability of jacks on your other video components and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output.
However, in case you make an HDMI connection, you can make both audio and video connections using a single HDMI cable.
25
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or
pre-amplifier.
If you set INPUT CH to 8ch in MULTI CH SET (see page 84), you can use the input jacks assigned as FRONT in
MULTI CH SET (see page 84) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
For 6-channel input
For 8-channel input
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
AUDIO
R
AUDIO
L
R
L
(PLAY)
IN
DVD
SURROUND
SURROUND
MD/TAPE
DTV
OUT
(REC)
(PLAY)
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SUBWOOFER CENTER
MULTI CH INPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
CBL/
SAT
IN
CD-R
IN
OUT
(REC)
R
L
Subwoofer
out
R
R
L
L
Subwoofer
out
VCR 1
R
L
OUT
Center
out
Center
out
CD
IN
DVR/VCR 2
Multi-format player/
Front External decoder Surround
out
out
Surround
back out
Multi-format player/ Surround out
R
External decoder
L
Front out
Notes
• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
• When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.
■ Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel
Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit.
S VIDEO
VIDEO
S
V
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
R
O
VIDEO/AUX
L
Optical out
Audio out R
Audio out L
Video out
S-video out
26
Game
console or
video camera
CONNECTIONS
Connecting audio components
O
Optical in
Optical in
MD recorder or
tape deck
CD recorder
Audio in
Audio out
R
O
L
R
Audio out
L
Audio in
R
L
R
L
PREPARATION
(U.S.A. model)
DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL
R
AUDIO
L
(PLAY)
IN
MD/TAPE
CD
CD
OPTICAL
OUT
(REC)
(PLAY)
IN
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
GND
CD
PHONO
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DIGITAL OUTPUT
R
L
R
L
Audio out
Audio out
Optical out
O
Coaxial out
CD player
GND
C
Turntable
Notes
• Check the availability of jacks on your audio components and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output.
• PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC
cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks.
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to
the GND terminal for some record players.
27
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting an external amplifier
If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,
or want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.
Notes
• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for
output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the
external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.
• The signal output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE
OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.
• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is set to
ZONE B (see page 87), signals will only be output at the
FRONT PRE OUT jacks.
1
2
FRONT
PRE OUT
R
L
SURROUND
R
SUBWOOFER
L
CENTER
5
3
4
SINGLE
(SB)
R
L
SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE
1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel line output jacks.
2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel line output jacks.
3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT
jacks
Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If
you only connect one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack.
5 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel line output jack.
Notes
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the
corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround
back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals
output at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks
may not correspond to the correct speakers.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer.
• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET settings (see
page 78).
28
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the antennas
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal
strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.
AM loop antenna
(included)
Indoor FM antenna
(included)
TUNER
FM ANT
75Ω
UNBAL.
GND
AM ANT
PREPARATION
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference,
connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven
into moist earth.
(U.S.A. model)
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1
Set up the AM loop antenna.
3
Orient the AM loop antenna for the best
reception.
Notes
2
Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop
antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND
terminals.
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an
outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor
antennas.
29
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the power cable
■ Connecting the AC power cable
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after
all other connections are complete, then plug the AC
power cable to an AC wall outlet.
Turning on and off this unit
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
1,4 2,3
(U.S.A. model)
CAUTION
Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as
doing so may result in fire hazard or electrical shock.
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
YPAO
ON/OFF
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
B
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
AC IN
ON
1
100W MAX.TOTAL
SWITCHED
AC OUTLETS
OFF
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
inward to the ON position to turn on the
power of this unit.
• Only this unit is turned on.
• Zone 2 and Zone 3 are set to the standby mode.
MASTER
ON
2
(U.S.A. model)
OFF
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel
(or STANDBY on the remote control) to set
this unit to the standby mode.
■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)
Use these 2 outlets to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the AC power cables of your other
components to these 2 outlets. Power to these 2 outlets is
supplied when the main room, Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned
on. However, power to these 2 outlets is cut off when the
main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off or when
MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed and
released outward to the OFF position. The maximum
power or the total power consumption of the components
that can be connected to these 2 outlets is 100 W.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost
in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet for more than one week.
30
STANDBY
ON/OFF
Front panel
or
Remote control
CONNECTIONS
3
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF
or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel (or
POWER on the remote control) to turn on this
unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Setting the speaker impedance
Follow the procedure below to change the impedance
setting for all speakers.
CAUTION
POWER
ON/OFF
or
Front panel
Remote control
If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to
6 ohms before using this unit.
1
y
Note
MASTER
ON
2
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF and ZONE 3
ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and
STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when
MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.
4
OFF
Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on the
power of this unit.
SP IMP.–8ΩMIN appears in the front panel display.
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
again to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
This unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off.
STRAIGHT
MASTER
EFFECT
ON
OFF
MASTER
ON
ADVANCED SETUP
SP IMP.-8 MIN
OFF
3
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select the impedance of
your speakers.
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
• Select 6 ohms if you are using 6 ohm speakers.
4
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and set this unit, Zone 2 and
Zone 3 to the standby mode.
This unit will be set to the standby mode.
MASTER
ON
OFF
Note
You can also set the speaker impedance by using the SP
IMP. parameter in the ADVANCED SETUP menu (see
page 90).
31
PREPARATION
• When MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON
position, you can also press POWER or STANDBY on the
remote control to turn on or set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone
3 to the standby mode simultaneously.
• For details about controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 using the
remote control, see page 106.
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to set
this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby
mode.
AUTO SETUP
AUTO SETUP
Introduction
This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you
avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and
achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound
your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
Optimizer microphone setup
1
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
SEARCH MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
A
Notes
YPAO
DISTANCE
Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening
position and adjusts the timing of each channel.
SIZE
Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the
appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.
EQ
Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric
equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and
create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly
important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers
for some channels or have a room with unique sonic
characteristics.
YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three
parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the
seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly
precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.
LEVEL
Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.
32
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be
output during the AUTO SETUP procedure.
• If the AUTO SETUP procedure stops and error messages
appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 115.
WIRING
Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of
each speaker.
B
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
EFFECT
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
YPAO performs the following checks and makes
appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible
sound from your system.
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
EDIT
CATEGORY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
Notes
• After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure
to disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.
– Keep it away from direct sunlight.
– Do not place it on top of this unit.
2
Place the optimizer microphone on a flat
level surface with the omni-directional
microphone head upward, at your normal
listening position.
If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer
mic at the same height as your ears would be when
you are seated in your listening position.
Optimizer microphone position
AUTO SETUP
Using AUTO SETUP
1
For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible
during the AUTO SETUP procedure (YPAO). If there is
too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
MENU
SRCH MODE
TV
y
Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP and then
press ENTER once to enter the main menu.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
2
PREPARATION
• You can run AUTO SETUP using the system menu that appears
in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the
OSD illustrations to explain the AUTO SETUP procedure.
• If an error occurs during the AUTO SETUP procedure and an
error message appears in the front panel display, see pages 115
and 116 for a complete list of error messages and proper
remedies.
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the
crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or
slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
SET MENU
MAX
MIN
. ;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
. ;INFORMATION
Subwoofer
POWER
TV
AV
A
XM
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
PURE DIRECT
MENU
SRCH MODE
BAND
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
ON SCREEN
RETURN
STRAIGHT
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
1
2-9
DISPLAY
XM MEMORY
DTV
p
p
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
LEVEL
POWER
EFFECT
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
MOVIE
PRESET/CH
DVD
SELECT
A SPEAKERS B
+10
ENT.
ENTER
AMP
+
+
+
SOURCE
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
TOP
PRESET
EXIT
TV
1
REC
A-E/CAT.
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RE–NAME
PURE DIRECT
(U.S.A. model)
3
Press n to select SETUP and then press
l / h to select:
AUTO
To automatically perform the entire AUTO SETUP
procedure.
RELOAD
To restore the last AUTO SETUP setting.
Note
RELOAD is available only when you have previously run
the AUTO SETUP procedure.
33
AUTO SETUP
4
■ If you selected AUTO in step 3
Press k / n repeatedly to select WIRING,
DISTANCE, SIZE, EQ or LEVEL.
The RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set.
RESULT:EXIT
1 AUTO:MENU
p
p
p
5
7
When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is
selected, press l / h to select:
p
WARNING 0
RESULT
.
SP :
5/4/0.1
.
DIST: 4.50/ 6.10m
.
LVL :-10.0/ +6.5dB
. >SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
.SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
WIRING;;;;;;CHECK
DISTANCE;;;;CHECK
SIZE;;;;;;;;CHECK
EQ;;;;;;;;;;NATURAL
LEVEL;;;;;;;CHECK
START
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Press k / n to select RESULT and then press
ENTER to display the AUTO SETUP results.
CHECK
To automatically check and adjust the selected item.
RESULT:WIRING
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK
Results of the speaker
connection and wiring
SKIP
To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments.
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
Note
RESULT:DISTANCE1
When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure
that SML or SMLx2 is selected in SPEAKER SET (see
page 78) and that 80Hz is selected in CROSS OVER (see
page 79).
FRONT L;;;;4.5m
CENTER;;;;;5.2m
FRONT R;;;;4.8m
PRNS L;;;;;5.2m
PRNS R;;;;;5.3m
Results of the speaker
distance from the
listening position
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
When EQ is selected, press l / h to select:
NATURAL
To average out the frequency response of all speakers
with higher frequencies being less emphasized.
Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little
harsh.
RESULT:SIZE
FRONT L;;;;;;LRG
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
FLAT
To average the frequency response of all speakers.
Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar
quality.
RESULT:EQ
CENTER 1:100Hz;;;+2.5dB
2:300Hz;;;-0.5dB
3:1.5kHz;;+0.5dB
4:1.8kHz;;+2.5dB
5:1.8kHz;;-3.5dB
6:2.5kHz;;+2.5dB
7:10kHz;;;+2.5dB
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
FRONT
To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in
accordance with the sound of your front speakers.
Recommended if your front speakers are of much
higher quality than your other speakers.
Press n to select START and then press
ENTER.
Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and
WAIT appears during the AUTO SETUP procedure.
Note
If E-10:INTERNAL ERROR appears during testing, restart
the procedure from step 3.
34
Results of the
parametric equalizer of
each speaker
RESULT:LEVEL1
FRONT L;;;+1.0dB
CENTER;;;;-1.5dB
FRONT R;;;+6.5dB
PRNS L;;;-10.0dB
PRNS R;;;;+1.0dB
SKIP
To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments.
6
Results of the
frequency response of
each speaker
Results of the volume
level of each speaker
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
y
• Press l / h repeatedly to move between each display.
• If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually
adjust each setup parameter, run MANUAL SETUP (see
page 75).
AUTO SETUP
■ If you selected RELOAD in step 3
Notes
The RESULT:EXIT display appears.
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of
your listening environment, run AUTO SETUP again to
re-calibrate your system.
• In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be
longer than the actual distance depending on the
characteristics of your subwoofer.
• In the EQ results, different values may be set for the same
band to provide finer adjustments.
7
p
p
9
Make sure that the pointer is pointing at SET
and CANCEL and then press l / h to select
SET or CANCEL.
8
Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
The SET MENU screen appears in the OSD.
SET MENU
. ;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
. ;INFORMATION
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
10
• Select SET to confirm the AUTO SETUP results.
• Select CANCEL to cancel the AUTO SETUP
results.
p
• Select SET to confirm the AUTO SETUP results.
• Select CANCEL to cancel the AUTO SETUP
results.
Make sure that the pointer is pointing at SET
and CANCEL and then press l / h to select
SET or CANCEL.
Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
The SET MENU screen appears in the OSD.
SET MENU
. ;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
. ;INFORMATION
p
p
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
35
PREPARATION
RESULT:EXIT
WARNING 0
RESULT
.
SP :
5/4/0.1
.
DIST: 4.50/ 6.10m
.
LVL :-10.0/ +6.5dB
. >SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
Press ENTER to return to the RESULT:EXIT
screen.
p
8
RESULT:EXIT
WARNING 0
RESULT
.
SP :
5/4/0.1
.
DIST: 4.50/ 6.10m
.
LVL :-10.0/ +6.5dB
. >SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
PLAYBACK
PLAYBACK
CAUTION
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS.
If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage
your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player
before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.
Basic operations
(U.S.A. model)
2
Turn on the power of the video monitor
connected to this unit.
3
Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel
(or press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote
control).
Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the
respective speakers are turned on or off.
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
INPUT
ZONE CONTROL
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
ON
B
YPAO
ON/OFF
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
SPEAKERS
A SPEAKERS B
+10
or
A
1
4
7
3
LEVEL
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
A
XM
POWER
STANDBY
AUDIO SEL
1
PRESET/CH
6
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
Front panel
When bi-wiring, select both A and B.
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
Remote control
Note
PURE DIRECT
SLEEP
ENT.
B
A-E/CAT.
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
ON SCREEN
RETURN
4
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
SOURCE
PRESET
EXIT
MOVIE
DVD
AMP
TOP
EFFECT
STEREO
SELECT
6
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
XM MEMORY
1
A SPEAKERS B
+10
ENT.
7
4
3
REC
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired
input source.
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
TV
LEARN
CLEAR
RE–NAME
PURE DIRECT
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or set
AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
POWER on the remote control) to turn on the
power of this unit.
V-AUX
DTV
Front panel
CD
MULTI CH IN
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
V-AUX
SP
A
Front panel
AMP
POWER
TV
Remote control
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
INPUT:
A.SEL:
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVD
AUTO
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
dB
VOLUME
L
R
Name of the currently selected input source
or
SOURCE
Remote control
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display and on the video
monitor for a few seconds.
ON/OFF
36
TUNER
or
(U.S.A. model)
1
PHONO
INPUT
5
Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the component.
See page 46 for details about tuning instructions.
PLAYBACK
6
Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust
the volume to the desired output level.
VOLUME
+
VOLUME
or
–
Remote control
Front panel
7
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel (or press one of the sound field
program buttons on the remote control) to
select the desired sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display and on the video monitor.
See page 64 for details about sound field programs.
or
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
Front panel
MOVIE
Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby
Digital and DTS, which is used to keep the programs at
the same average listening level so the user does not have
to change the volume control between Dolby Digital and
DTS programs. When playing back software which has
been encoded in Dolby Digital and DTS, sometimes you
may see a brief message in the front panel display which
will read “Dial Norm X dB” (X being a numeric value).
The display is showing how the program level relates with
THX calibration level. If you want to play the program at
calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to adjust the
volume.
DialNorm;;+4dB
For example, if you see the following message:
“Dial Norm + 4 dB” in the front panel display, to keep the
overall output level at THX calibrated loudness, just turn
down the volume control by 4dB. However, unlike a
movie theater where the playback loudness is preset, you
can choose your preferred volume setting for best
enjoyment.
A SPEAKERS B
+10
ENT.
Remote control
Name of the sound field category
V-AUX
HiFi DSP
SP
A
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
PHONO
TUNER
XM
dB
VOLUME
L
R
Program name
Notes
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, and not on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with that source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
MULTI CH INPUT is selected.
37
BASIC
OPERATION
PROGRAM
■ Notes on Dialogue Normalization
(Dial Norm)
PLAYBACK
Additional operations
■ Adjusting the tonal quality
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front L/R and center speaker channels.
1
■ Muting the sound output
Use this feature to mute the sound output.
1
Press MUTE on the remote control.
The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel
display.
Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select TREBLE or BASS.
MUTE
MUTE
Flashes
TONE
CONTROL
2
2
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the
high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the
low-frequency response (BASS).
Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to
resume the sound output.
The MUTE indicator disappears from the display.
+
MUTE
or
VOLUME
PROGRAM
–
y
3
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
BYPASS and cancel the tone control.
TONE
CONTROL
Notes
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and
center speakers.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (see page 40) or
PURE DIRECT (see page 41) is selected, or when
MULTI CH INPUT is selected.
38
You can adjust how much the muting function reduces the sound
output (see page 82).
■ Using SILENT CINEMA
Use this feature to enjoy multi-channel music or movie
sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround,
through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the
SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
Note
SILENT CINEMA is ineffective in the following cases:
– MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input mode.
– PURE DIRECT is selected.
– A 2ch Stereo program is selected.
– This unit is in the STRAIGHT mode.
PLAYBACK
■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
Auto
AUTO
If a signal flag can be recognized, the unit selects the
optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1
channels. If the signal flag cannot be recognized, or
no flag is present in the input signal, this unit cannot
automatically play back the signal in 6.1/7.1
channels.
Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control so that MULTI
CH INPUT appears in the front panel display and
on the video monitor.
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel
Decoders
You can select a decoder from the following list
depending on the format of the software you are
playing.
Remote control
PLIIxMovie
To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1
channels using the Pro Logic x movie decoder.
Note
PLIIxMusic
To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Pro Logic x music decoder.
EX/ES
To play back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the DTS-ES decoder.
■ Enjoying multi-channel software in
6.1/7.1 channel surround
EX
To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use
this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for
multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic x,
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders.
1
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
EXTD SUR. on the remote control to switch
between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1 channel playback.
AMP
EXTD SUR.
SOURCE
8
TV
2
Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder
when the name of a decoder (PL xMovie, for
example) is displayed in the front panel
display.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
OFF
To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1
channels.
y
When SB L/R SP is set to LRGx1 or SMLx1 (see page 79), the
surround back channel will output from the left SURROUND
BACK speaker terminals.
Notes
• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag
which cannot be automatically detected. When you play these
kinds of discs in 6.1-channel, select decoders (PL xMovie,
PL xMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually.
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is
pressed in the following cases:
– When SUR. L/R SP or SB L/R SP is set to NONE
(see page 79).
– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
are being played.
– When the source being played does not contain surround L/R
channel signals.
– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected.
• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be
reset to AUTO.
• The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when SB L/R SP is
set to NONE (see page 79).
• PL xMovie cannot be selected when SB L/R SP is set to
LRGx1 or SMLx1 (see page 79).
39
BASIC
OPERATION
When MULTI CH INPUT is shown in the front panel display and
the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select
another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or one of the input selector buttons on the remote control), press
MULTI CH INPUT so that MULTI CH INPUT disappears from
the front panel display and the video monitor.
PLAYBACK
■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround
Decoder types for the Enhanced, MOVIE
THEATER or THX program
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back in multiple channels.
1
<PRO LOGIC>
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
STANDARD on the remote control to switch
between the Surround and Enhanced
programs.
<PLIIx Movie>
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.
<Neo:6 Cinema>
DTS processing for movie software.
AMP
STANDARD
SOURCE
6
TV
You can also press MOVIE or THX on the remote
control to select the MOVIE THEATER or THX
programs.
MOVIE
THX
4
2
or
5
Press SELECT on the remote control to
select a decoder.
SELECT
7
You can select a decoder from the following list
depending on the type of software you are playing
and your personal preference.
Decoder types for the Surround program
<PRO LOGIC>
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
<PLIIx Movie>
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.
<PLIIx Music>
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.
<PLIIx Game>
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software.
<Neo:6 Cinema>
DTS processing for movie software.
<Neo:6 Music>
DTS processing for music software.
40
y
• You can also select a decoder by using DECODER MODE in
INPUT MENU (see page 84).
• You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote
control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message
display.
Note
The Pro Logic x decoder automatically changes to the
Pro Logic decoder when SB L/R SP is set to NONE
(see page 79).
PLAYBACK
■ Using PURE DIRECT
■ Using the night listening modes
PURE DIRECT bypasses the decoders and DSP
processors of this unit as well as shuts down the video
circuitry, allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound
fidelity from analog and PCM sources.
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volume levels or at night. Choose
either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on
the type of source you are playing.
Notes
Notes
1
• You cannot use the night listening modes if PURE DIRECT or
MULTI CH INPUT are being used or if headphones are
connected even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when
PURE DIRECT is selected.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and the surround sound settings being used.
1
AMP
NIGHT
SOURCE
NIGHT
Lights up
• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volume levels.
• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select NIGHT:OFF if you do not want to use this
function.
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
or
Remote control
2
Note
The front panel display switches on momentarily when an
operation is performed.
2
AUDIO
TV
Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel or on
the remote control to activate pure direct.
The indicator around the button on the front panel
lights up and the front panel display automatically
goes out.
Front panel
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to
select NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC.
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
BASIC
OPERATION
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in
the PURE DIRECT mode.
• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input. When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be
heard.
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL on the front panel and the OSD menu
settings are ineffective in the PURE DIRECT mode.
• The following operations are not possible in the PURE
DIRECT mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the short message
– adjusting OSD menu parameters
– all video functions including video conversions
– HDMI digital video up-conversion of analog video signals
– HDMI features including digital input and output
• PURE DIRECT is automatically canceled whenever this unit is
set to the standby mode.
Press l / h to adjust the effect level of
compression while NIGHT:CINEMA or
NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel or on
the remote control again to deactivate pure
direct.
The indicator around the button on the front panel
goes out and the previous settings are restored.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
Remote control
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
or
Front panel
Effect.Lvl:MID
Remote control
• Select MIN for minimum compression.
• Select MID for standard compression.
• Select MAX for maximum compression.
y
NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC settings are stored
independently.
41
PLAYBACK
■ Using the sleep timer
■ Downmixing to 2 channels
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLETS.
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multichannel sources.
1
2
Select an input source and start playback on
the source component.
Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or set
AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch
Stereo.
2ch Stereo appears in the front panel display.
PROGRAM
Press SLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Front panel
SLEEP
or
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
SLEEP 120min
SLEEP OFF
AMP
STEREO
SOURCE
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 30min
1
TV
SLEEP 60min
Remote control
The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the
amount of time for the sleep timer.
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
SLEEP 120min
SLEEP00120min
SP
A
PHONO
TUNER
XM
L
R
SLEEP
The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound
field program.
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
SP
A
3
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP
PHONO
TUNER
XM
dB
VOLUME
L
R
SLEEP
Press SLEEP repeatedly so that SLEEP OFF
appears in the front panel display.
SLEEP
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
Note
You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or
BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT (see page 78).
■ Listening to unprocessed input signals
When the unit is in the STRAIGHT mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output only from the front L/R speakers.
Multi-channel sources are decoded straightly into the
appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
1
MD/TAPE
CD-R
SLEEP OFF
SP
A
2ch Stereo
dB
VOLUME
CD
PHONO
TUNER
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel or on the remote control to select
STRAIGHT.
STRAIGHT appears in the front panel display.
XM
STRAIGHT
dB
VOLUME
L
R
STRAIGHT
SLEEP
or
After a few seconds, SLEEP OFF disappears, and the
SLEEP indicator turns off.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on
the front panel) to set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby
mode.
42
EFFECT
EFFECT
Front panel
Remote control
PLAYBACK
2
■ Selecting audio input modes
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel or on the remote control again to turn
the sound effect back on.
STRAIGHT disappears from the front panel display.
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
or
EFFECT
EFFECT
Front panel
Remote control
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field.
If you set SUR. L/R SP to NONE (see page 78), Virtual
CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you
select a CINEMA DSP sound field program.
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can
select the type of input signal you want to use.
Note
This feature is not available if no digital input jacks (OPTICAL,
COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not
available as an input mode if HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks
are not assigned. Use I/O ASSIGNMENT in INPUT MENU to
reassign the respective input jacks (see page 83).
Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel or
AUDIO SEL on the remote control to select an
input mode.
AUDIO
SELECT
or
Front panel
Note
■ Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine images from a video source with sound
from an audio source. For example, you can listen to
classical music while enjoying beautiful scenery from the
video source on the video monitor.
Press one of the input selector buttons on the
remote control to select a video source and then
select an audio source.
Audio sources
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
DTV
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
Video sources
Note
If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select
the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front
panel or on the remote control.
V-AUX
SP
A
DVR/VCR 2
POWER
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER
TV
AV
A
PHONO
Remote control
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
INPUT:
A.SEL:
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVD
AUTO
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
dB
VOLUME
L
R
Type of the input mode
AUTO
Automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
1) HDMI
2) Digital signals*
3) Analog signals
HDMI
Selects only HDMI signals. If no HDMI signals are
input, no sound is output.
COAX/OPT
Selects digital signals input at the OPTICAL or
COAXIAL jacks. Use if HDMI signals are also being
input.
ANALOG
Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are
input, no sound is output.
43
BASIC
OPERATION
Virtual CINEMA DSP is ineffective even if SUR. L/R SP is set to
NONE (see page 78) in the following cases:
– If MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
– If headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
STANDBY
POWER
PLAYBACK
y
Audio information
• We recommend using AUTO in most cases.
• You can designate the default input mode to be selected when
the power of this unit is turned on (see page 86).
FORMAT
Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to analog
input.
Notes
• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player.
• If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder
automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program.
• The input jacks not assigned are not available as input modes.
SAMPLING
Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to
detect the sampling frequency “?” appears.
CHANNEL
Number of source channels in the input signal. For
example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front
channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed
as “3/2/0.1”.
■ Displaying information about the input
source
You can display the type, format and sampling frequency
of the current input signal.
1
BITRATE
Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate
“– – –” appears.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
SET MENU on the remote control.
The top SET MENU screen appears in the OSD.
DIALOGUE
Dialogue normalization information for Dolby
Digital and DTS signals.
AMP
SET MENU
MENU
SOURCE
FLAG
Flag data encoded in Dolby Digital, DTS and PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically switch
decoders.
SRCH MODE
TV
SET MENU
Video information
. ;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
. ;INFORMATION
HDMI Signal Type
Type of the HDMI signals input or output at the
HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.
2
p
p
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
HDMI Resolution
Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the
HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.
Press n repeatedly to select INFORMATION
and then press ENTER.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
Analog Resolution
Resolution of the analog signals input or output at the
video component jacks of this unit.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
3
Press SET MENU on the remote control again
to exit.
SET MENU
MENU
The following information appears in the OSD.
Note
Press l / h to toggle between the audio and video
information displays.
44
SRCH MODE
RECORDING
RECORDING
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for those components.
(U.S.A. model)
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
YPAO
ON/OFF
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
ON
B
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
2
Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected components.
See page 30 for details.
2
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and
then press one of the input selector buttons)
to select the input source you want to record
from.
INPUT
Front panel
or
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
AMP
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
Notes
• The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 can be
selected separately.
• When this unit is in the standby mode, you cannot record from
other components connected to this unit.
• The settings for TONE CONTROL (see page 38), VOLUME,
SP LEVEL (see page 80) and programs do not affect recorded
material.
• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when
recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source
component is connected to provide only an S-video or only a
composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or only
a composite video signal to your VCR.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not
output at the analog AUDIO OUT L/R jacks for recording.
Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN L/R jacks are
not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your
source component is connected to provide only digital or analog
signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC)
channel. For example, the signal input at VCR 1 IN is not
output at VCR 1 OUT.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may
infringe copyright laws.
• Some HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN
2 jack of this unit may not be output at the DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL) jacks depending on the type of those HDMI audio
signals.
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
SOURCE
TV
Remote control
3
Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4
Start recording on the recording component.
■ Notes on the DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded in DTS, when your player is
compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will
be output from the player.
45
BASIC
OPERATION
1
y
FM/AM TUNING
FM/AM TUNING
Automatic tuning
3
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)
repeatedly so that the AUTO indicator lights
up in the front panel display.
TUNING
MODE
(U.S.A. model)
AUTO
AUTO/MAN'L
Lights up
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this
unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.
Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
YPAO
ON/OFF
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
ON
EFFECT
INPUT
B
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
43 2 3
1
1
SEARCH MODE
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and
then press TUNER on the remote control) to
select TUNER as the input source.
Preset station
group and
number
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
Reception
band
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
Frequency of
the received
station
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
A1:AM 1070 kHz
Sci-Fi
INPUT
SP
A
PHONO
TUNER
XM
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
Name of the sound field program
Front panel
4
or
AMP
TUNER
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to
begin automatic tuning.
Press h to tune into a higher frequency.
Press l to tune into a lower frequency.
SOURCE
PRESET/TUNING/CH
TV
Remote control
2
Press FM/AM on the front panel (or BAND on
the remote control) to select the reception
band.
FM or AM appears in the front panel display.
FM/AM
LEVEL
or
DISPLAY
BAND
Front panel
Remote control
or
46
TITLE
V-AUX
SP
A
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
A1:AM 1530 kHz
Sci-Fi
CD
PHONO
TUNER
AUTO
XM
TUNED
dB
VOLUME
L
R
When the unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
FM/AM TUNING
Manual tuning
Automatic preset tuning
Manual tuning is effective when stations signals are weak.
Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically
change the reception mode to monaural reception to
increase the signal quality.
1
2
Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatic tuning”
to select TUNER and the reception band.
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals
and store up to 40 (8 stations in each of the 5 groups, A1
to E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
Note
You must first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press
TUNER on the remote control to select TUNER as the input
source.
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)
repeatedly so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
(U.S.A. model)
TUNING
MODE
PURE DIRECT
AUTO/MAN'L
VOLUME
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this
unit is in the PRESET mode and tuning is not
possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it
off.
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
YPAO
ON/OFF
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
PRESET/
TUNING
1 32
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
1
V-AUX
SP
A
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
A1:AM 1070 kHz
Straight
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
Press FM/AM on the front panel (or BAND on
the remote control) to select FM as the
reception band.
dB
VOLUME
L
FM/AM
R
or
LEVEL
TITLE
DISPLAY
3
Front panel
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to
manually tune into the desired station.
Press h to tune into a higher frequency.
Press l to tune into a lower frequency.
PRESET/TUNING/CH
y
Press and hold the button to continue searching.
2
BAND
Remote control
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator lights up in the front
panel display.
TUNING
MODE
AUTO
AUTO/MAN'L
Lights up
47
BASIC
OPERATION
ON
B
SILENT CINEMA
FM/AM TUNING
3
■ Customized automatic preset tuning
Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
on the front panel for more than 3 seconds.
The preset group and number as well as the
MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After
approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts
from the currently selected frequency and proceeds
toward the higher frequencies.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
V-AUX
SP
A
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
C8:FM 87.5 MHz
Straight
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
AUTO MEMORY
dB
VOLUME
L
R
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
You can specify a preset station group and a preset station
number from which this unit stores the FM stations
received by automatic preset tuning.
1
Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatic tuning”.
2
Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING/
CH l / h on the front panel to select the
preset station group and the preset station
number where the first received station will
be stored.
For example, if you select C5, the first received
station is automatically programmed to C5 and the
next received stations are sequentially programmed to
C6, C7, etc.
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING/CH
CATEGORY
Notes
• Any station data stored under a preset station number is cleared
when you store a new station under the same preset station
number.
• If the preset number of the received stations does not reach 40
(E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after
programming all available stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it by following the procedure in “Manual preset
tuning”.
48
Note
Automatic preset tuning stops when the received stations have all
been stored up to E8.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost
in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet for more than one week.
FM/AM TUNING
Manual preset tuning
3
You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations
in each of the 5 groups, A1 to E8) manually.
Note
Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel
repeatedly to select a preset station group (A
to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)
appears in the front panel display.
You must first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press
TUNER on the remote control to select TUNER as the input
source.
A/B/C/D/E
CATEGORY
(U.S.A. model)
PURE DIRECT
Preset station group
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
V-AUX
SP
A
2,5
4
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
A :AM 630 kHz
Sci-Fi
SP
A
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
PHONO
TUNER
XM
TUNED
dB
VOLUME
L
TUNED
MEMORY
dB
VOLUME
L
R
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel to select a preset station number
(1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH h on the front panel to
select a higher preset station number.
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l on the front panel to
select a lower preset station number.
R
PRESET/TUNING/CH
When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel
display shows the frequency of the received station.
2
Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel.
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.
V-AUX
SP
A
MEMORY
MEMORY
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
C3:AM 630 kHz
Sci-Fi
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
TUNED
MEMORY
dB
VOLUME
L
R
MAN'L/AUTO FM
Flashes
49
BASIC
OPERATION
Repeat steps in “Automatic tuning” or
“Manual tuning” to tune into a station
automatically or manually.
See page 46 for tuning instructions.
V-AUX
VCR 1
C :AM 630 kHz
Sci-Fi
VIDEO/AUX
4
DVR/VCR 2
OPTICAL
OFF
3
1
B
YPAO
ON/OFF
MASTER
ON
EFFECT
INPUT
FM/AM TUNING
5
Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset group and number you
have selected.
MEMORY
Selecting preset stations
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station number under which it was stored.
Note
Prior to selecting a preset station, you should preset stations first.
For details, see “Automatic preset tuning” on page 47 or “Manual
preset tuning” on page 49.
MAN'L/AUTO FM
(U.S.A. model)
PURE DIRECT
V-AUX
SP
A
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
C3:AM 630 kHz
Sci-Fi
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
VOLUME
TUNED
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
L
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
R
A
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
B
YPAO
ON/OFF
ON
6
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
dB
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
1
2
3
Notes
TV MUTE
PHONO
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
V-AUX
TUNER
CBL/SAT
CD
MD/TAPE
MULTI CH IN
1
CD-R
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TITLE
MUTE
SET MENU
21
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
2
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
DTV
PURE DIRECT
MENU
SRCH MODE
BAND
DVD
A-E/CAT.
STRAIGHT
ON SCREEN
RETURN
DISPLAY
3
EFFECT
XM MEMORY
(U.S.A. model)
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and
then press TUNER on the remote control) to
select TUNER as the input source.
INPUT
Front panel
or
AMP
TUNER
SOURCE
TV
Remote control
2
Press A/B/C/D/E (or l / h on the remote
control) to select the preset station group.
The preset group letter appears in the front panel
display and changes each time you press the button.
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
CATEGORY
Front panel
50
or
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
Remote control
FM/AM TUNING
3
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET k / n on the remote control) to
select a preset station number (1 through 8).
The preset group and number appear in the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the TUNED indicator lights up.
Exchanging preset stations
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station E1 with A5.
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
EDIT
CATEGORY
PRESET/TUNING/CH
MAIN ZONE
or
MASTER
DTV
DVD
PROGRAM
MD/TAPE
CD-R
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
Sci-Fi
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
TUNED
dB
VOLUME
L
B
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
PHONES
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
1,3 1,3 2,4
1
SP
A
OPTIMIZER
MIC
Remote control
Front panel
CBL/SAT
ZONE CONTROL
MULTI ZONE
A
ON
VCR 1
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
YPAO
ON/OFF
DVR/VCR 2
EFFECT
INPUT
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
V-AUX
SEARCH MODE
R
(U.S.A. model)
Select preset station E1 by using
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations”.
CATEGORY
2
Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
E1 and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
TUNED
MEMORY
dB
VOLUME
L
R
Select preset station A5 by using
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
A5 and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
TUNED
MEMORY
A5:FM 90.6 MHz
Sci-Fi
SP
A
4
VCR 1
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
Sci-Fi
SP
A
3
DVR/VCR 2
dB
VOLUME
L
R
Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
V-AUX
SP
A
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
EDIT E1-A5
Sci-Fi
CD-R
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
TUNED
dB
VOLUME
L
R
51
BASIC
OPERATION
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
What is XM Satellite Radio?
XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with
millions of listeners across the United States broadcasting
live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes
more than 150 digital channels of choice from coast to
coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip
hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33
channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and
entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels
of the traffic and weather information for major
metropolitan areas nationwide.
XM Satellite Radio connections
Connect the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna
accessory (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear of
this unit. (For details, refer to the operating instructions
provided with the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna
accessory).
(U.S.A. model)
DIGITAL INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
COAXIAL
DVD
CD
DVD
DVR/
VCR 2
DTV
OPTICAL
CD
CBL/
SAT
DVD
Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you
will need to set up an account and activate service with
XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check
your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio”
on page 54. For further information on XM Satellite Radio
services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com”.
DTV
RS-232C
IN 1
MONITOR OUT
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
IN 2
CD-R
OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
XM
HDMI
■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.
Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold
separately. Premium Channel available at additional
monthly cost. Installation costs and other fees and taxes,
including a one-time activation fee may apply.
Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and
programming subject to change. Channels with frequent
explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel
blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling
1-800-XMRADIO. Subscriptions subject to Customer
Agreement available at xmradio.com. Only available in
the 48 continuous United States. © 2005 XM Satellite
Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
52
XM jack
Notes
• For information on obtaining the XM Connect-and-Play digital
antenna accessory, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com” or consult your local retailer that
sells XM Ready products.
• To ensure the optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio
signals, the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory
must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no
obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or
outdoors.
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions
This section describes the functions of each control used for XM Satellite Radio tuning.
Note
The following controls are only available when XM is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set
AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select XM as the input source.
■ Front panel functions
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
34 5
2
1
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
■ Remote control functions
FM/AM
MEMORY
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
TUNING
MODE
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
EDIT
CATEGORY
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
EFFECT
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
YPAO
B
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
LEVEL
1
2
3
SELECT
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SET MENU
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
ON SCREEN
RETURN
STRAIGHT
4
5
DISPLAY
EFFECT
XM MEMORY
STEREO
OPTICAL
PRESET/CH
TITLE
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
1
MEMORY 2
6
VIDEO/AUX
(U.S.A. model)
2 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
(All Channel Search mode)
Searches a radio channel within all channels. Press and
hold for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Searches a radio channel within the selected category.
Press and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).
3 SEARCH MODE
Switches between the All Channel Search, Category
Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 56).
4 DISPLAY
Switches XM information such as channel number/name,
category or artist name/song title displayed in the front
panel display (see page 60).
5 MEMORY
Switches the unit to the preset memory mode.
0
EON
A SPEAKERS B
+10
MODE
ENT.
7
PTY SEEK START
1 XM
Selects XM as the input source.
2 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h
(All Channel Search mode)
Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the channel category.
Press PRESET/CH k / n to search a radio channel within
all channels. Press and hold for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the channel category.
Press PRESET/CH k / n to search a radio channel within
the selected category. Press and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the preset group (A to
E).
Press PRESET/CH k / n to change the preset number (1 to 8).
3 XM MEMORY
Switches the unit to the preset memory mode.
4 SRCH MODE
Switches between the All Channel Search, Category
Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 56.).
5 DISPLAY
Switches XM information such as channel number/name,
category or artist name/song title displayed in the front
panel display (see page 60).
6 Numeric buttons
(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)
Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.
(Preset Search mode)
Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.
7 ENT.
Confirms an entered channel number during the Direct
Number Access mode (see page 58).
53
BASIC
OPERATION
1 CATEGORY
(All Channel Search mode)
Changes the channel category to next one (while staying
in the All Channel Search mode).
(Category Search mode)
Changes the channel category to next one.
(Preset Search mode)
Switches between five preset groups (A to E).
(U.S.A. model)
9
FREQ/TEXT
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control functions
1
2
DTV
CD
CD-R
2
3
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
STANDBY
PHONO
4
5
6
ENT
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
V-AUX
7
8
9
0
3
4
5
6
A-E/CAT.
k
POWER
XM
TUNER
k
k
1
DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
ALL
k
CAT.
PRESET
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
ID1 ID2
7
8
9
NUMBER
Activating XM Satellite Radio
To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio
service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.
Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and
then access the website at “http://activate.xmradio.com/”
or call “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” with a
major credit card for signing up.
(U.S.A. model)
1 XM
Selects XM as the input source.
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
2 Input selector/numeric buttons
(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)
Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.
(Preset Search mode)
Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.
AUDIO
SELECT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
ON
B
YPAO
ON/OFF
VIDEO
PHONES
1
1
S VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
Note
To enter numbers, you must press and hold SHIFT before you
press any of these buttons.
MULTI CH
INPUT
3
Rotate the INPUT selector (or set AMP/
SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press XM
on the remote control) to select XM as the
input source.
The XM indicator lights up.
3 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h
(All Channel Search mode)
Press l / h to change the channel category.
Press k / n to search a radio channel within all channels.
Press and hold for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Press l / h to change the channel category.
Press k / n to search a radio channel within the selected
category. Press and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Press l / h to change the preset group (A to E).
Press k / n to change the preset number (1 to 8).
INPUT
Front panel
or
AMP
XM
SOURCE
4 ALL
Selects the All Channel Search mode (see page 56).
TV
5 ENT
Confirms an entered channel number during the Direct
Number Access mode (see page 58).
6 NUMBER
Press and hold before you press the input selector/numeric
buttons to switch the function to entering numbers.
7 DISPLAY
Switches XM information such as channel number/name,
category or artist name/song title displayed in the front
panel display (see page 60).
8 PRESET
Selects the Preset Search mode (see page 57).
9 CAT.
Selects the Category Search mode (see page 57)
54
Remote control
V-AUX
SP
A
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
INPUT: XM
Sci-Fi
CD
PHONO
TUNER
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
XM
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
2
Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level
and adjust the orientation of the XM Satellite
Radio antenna for a better percentage of the
reception level.
Selecting the XM Satellite Radio
mode
(U.S.A. model)
y
You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by
using the ANTENNA parameter in XM RADIO SET
(see page 88).
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
SEARCH MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
3
YPAO
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
ON
B
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
1
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press XM on the
remote control) to select XM as the input source.
Information (such as channel number/name, category, or
artist name/song title) for the channel currently selected
appears in the front panel display and the XM indicator
lights up.
INPUT
PRESET/CH
XM
or
PRESET/TUNING/CH
or
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
Remote control
Front panel
Front panel
Remote control
V-AUX
Note
SP
A
You cannot select channel 0 if the All Channel Search mode
(see page 56) is not selected.
4
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
[001] Preview
Sci-Fi
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
y
Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number
displayed in the front panel display and write
it down.
• Selecting the XM band automatically recalls the channel
previously selected.
• You can change the kind of channel information by pressing
DISPLAY repeatedly (see page 60).
ID:_____________________________________
Note
The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks.
55
BASIC
OPERATION
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to
select channel 0.
EFFECT
INPUT
ON/OFF
Notes
• If CHECK ANTENNA appears in the front panel display,
the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory may
not be connected to the XM jack on the rear of this unit
properly. See “XM Satellite Radio connections” on
page 52 and check the connection.
• The ANTENNA parameter cannot be adjusted by using
the remote control.
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
Using XM Satellite Radio search
modes
3
To change the channel category, press
CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote
control) repeatedly.
You can search for the channel you want to listen to using
one of three search modes. You can also enter the number
directly to select the desired channel. For details, see
“Direct Number Access mode” on page 58.
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
or
ENTER
CATEGORY
■ All Channel Search mode
A-E/CAT.
(U.S.A. model)
Front panel
Remote control
PURE DIRECT
4
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
ZONE CONTROL
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
YPAO
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
ON
EFFECT
INPUT
ON/OFF
B
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
VIDEO
PHONES
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
To search a channel within all channels,
press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control)
repeatedly.
PRESET/CH
3
4 2
PRESET/TUNING/CH
or
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
1
Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio
mode” on page 55.
Front panel
2
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on
the remote control) repeatedly to select ALL
CH SEARCH.
PRESET/
TUNING
SET MENU
EDIT
MENU
or
SRCH MODE
SEARCH MODE
Front panel
V-AUX
SP
A
56
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
Remote control
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
ALL CH SEARCH0
Sci-Fi
PHONO
TUNER
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
XM
Remote control
y
You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing
and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/
CH k / n on the remote control).
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Category Search mode
■ Preset Search mode
(U.S.A. model)
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you should preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For
details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels”
on page 59. All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls 001
Preview by the factory setting.
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
INPUT
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
ON
B
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
VIDEO
PHONES
(U.S.A. model)
ZONE CONTROL
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
YPAO
ON/OFF
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
4 2
3
AUDIO
SELECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
SEARCH MODE
ZONE CONTROL
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
YPAO
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio
mode” on page 55.
ON
B
SILENT CINEMA
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on
the remote control) repeatedly to select CAT
SEARCH.
PRESET/
TUNING
SET MENU
or
SEARCH MODE
ZONE 3
L
R
PHONES
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO/AUX
4 2
1
Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio
mode” on page 55.
2
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on
the remote control) repeatedly to select
PRESET SEARCH.
SRCH MODE
Front panel
ZONE 2
VIDEO
Remote control
PRESET/
TUNING
SET MENU
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CAT SEARCH
Sci-Fi
SP
A
CD
PHONO
TUNER
AUTO
Front panel
dB
To change the channel category, press
CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote
control) repeatedly.
PRESET/CH
or
DVR/VCR 2
3
ENTER
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PRESET SEARCH
Sci-Fi
SP
A
A/B/C/D/E
CATEGORY
Remote control
R
V-AUX
3
SRCH MODE
SEARCH MODE
XM
VOLUME
L
MENU
or
EDIT
PHONO
TUNER
XM
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
To change the preset group (A to E), press
CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote
control) repeatedly.
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT.
A/B/C/D/E
Front panel
Remote control
CATEGORY
or
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
4
To search a channel within the selected
channel category, press PRESET/TUNING/CH
l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote
control) repeatedly.
PRESET/CH
Front panel
4
Remote control
To change the preset number (1 to 8), press
PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k
/ n on the remote control) repeatedly.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/TUNING/CH
ENTER
or
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/TUNING/CH
or
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
Front panel
Remote control
Front panel
y
You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing
and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/
CH k / n on the remote control).
Remote control
y
You can also select the preset number directly by pressing
the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.
57
BASIC
OPERATION
MENU
EDIT
S VIDEO
OFF
3
2
EFFECT
INPUT
ON/OFF
1
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Direct Number Access mode
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
3
PURE DIRECT
2
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
ON-SCREEN
RETURN
STRAIGHT
Press the numeric buttons to enter the
desired channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
numeric buttons as shown below.
DISPLAY
EFFECT
XM MEMORY
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
MOVIE
A SPEAKERS B
+10
MODE
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
3
4
ENT.
The display changes as follows.
PTY SEEK START
(U.S.A. model)
V-AUX
1
Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio
mode” on page 55.
2
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on
the remote control) repeatedly to select ALL
CH SEARCH or CAT SEARCH.
PRESET/
TUNING
Front panel
SP
A
V-AUX
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
CD-R
CD
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
PHONO
TUNER
XM
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
CD-R
CD
PHONO
R
TUNER
XM
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
<XM>123
Sci-Fi
CD-R
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
AUTO
dB
L
R
4
CAT SEARCH
Sci-Fi
DVR/VCR 2
VOLUME
or
SP
A
MD/TAPE
Remote control
ALL CH SEARCH0
Sci-Fi
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
SRCH MODE
SP
A
V-AUX
DTV
<XM> -12
Sci-Fi
SP
A
V-AUX
SP
A
CBL/SAT
MENU
or
SEARCH MODE
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
<XM> --1
Sci-Fi
SET MENU
EDIT
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
PHONO
TUNER
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
XM
If you enter fewer than three numbers, you
may press ENT. to tune to the channel
immediately or wait a few seconds to confirm
the entered channel number.
ENT.
y
• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after entering
one-digit or two-digit number, the unit automatically
confirms the entered channel number.
• Pressing a button other than numeric buttons or ENT.
cancels the direct number access procedure.
58
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
Setting XM Satellite Radio preset
channels
3
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels (eight preset numbers in five preset
groups, A1 to E8). You can then recall any preset channel
easily by selecting the preset group and number as
described in “Preset Search mode” on page 57.
While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,
press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the
remote control) to select a preset group
(A to E).
The group letter appears.
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
or
(U.S.A. model)
ENTER
CATEGORY
A-E/CAT.
PURE DIRECT
MULTI CH
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A/B/C/D/E
TUNING
MODE
FM/AM
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L
Remote control
Front panel
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL
EDIT
CATEGORY
MAIN ZONE
SEARCH MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ZONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
A
YPAO
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MASTER
ON
B
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
VIDEO
PHONES
AUDIO
V-AUX
OPTICAL
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
C
VIDEO/AUX
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
[040] Deep Tra
Sci-Fi
SP
A
L
R
PRESET/CH
PRESET/TUNING/CH
PHONO
TUNER
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
XM
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
Front panel
When the channel number 040 is selected
V-AUX
2
XM
AUTO MEMORY
While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,
press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to
select a preset number (1 to 8).
or
DVR/VCR 2
TUNER
dB
VOLUME
Press MEMORY on the front panel (or
XM MEMORY on the remote control) when
XM is selected as the input source.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for about five seconds.
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
Remote control
CBL/SAT
C5
SP
A
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
[040] Deep
Sci-Fi
PHONO
TUNER
XM
AUTO MEMORY
dB
VOLUME
L
R
Preset number
MEMORY
RETURN
MAN'L/AUTO FM
or
Front panel
XM MEMORY
Remote control
MEMORY
Flashes
59
BASIC
OPERATION
4
Search the XM Satellite Radio channel you
want to set as a preset channel.
To search the desired channel, carry out “All Channel
Search mode” on page 56, “Category Search mode”
on page 57, or “Direct Number Access mode” on
page 58.
V-AUX
PHONO
Preset group
2,5
4
DTV
[040] Deep
Sci-Fi
SP
A
OFF
3
1
EFFECT
INPUT
ON/OFF
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
5
While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,
press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM
MEMORY on the remote control) to preset the
selected XM Satellite Radio channel.
A colon appears next to the preset number for
confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off.
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information
You can display XM information (such as channel
number/name, category, or artist name/song title) for the
channel currently selected in the OSD and in the front
panel display.
MEMORY
y
RETURN
or
MAN'L/AUTO FM
You can select the amount of time while the XM Satellite Radio
information is displayed in the OSD (see page 88).
XM MEMORY
Front panel
Remote control
Note
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
C5: [040] Deep
Sci-Fi
SP
A
PHONO
TUNER
XM
If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel
display, see TROUBLESHOOTING on page 113.
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
Colon appears
Note
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information in the OSD
Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the
remote control.
The following screen is displayed in the OSD.
Presetting a new channel clears the former preset channel
stored in the same preset group and number.
TUNING
MODE
ON SCREEN
or
DISPLAY
AUTO/MAN'L
Front panel
Remote control
XM INFORMATION
p
p
ALL CH SEARCH
XM
: 012
CHAN : Deep Tracks
CAT
: Rock
NAME : Led Zeppelin
TITLE : StairwayToHeaven
. ([012]Deep Tra)
[]/[]:CHANNEL
[<]/[>]:CATEGORY
Notes
• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press
ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the
OSD.
• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released
if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you
change the XM Satellite Radio channel.
• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information
screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM
Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote
control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio
information screen is being on hold.
60
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information in the front panel display
Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the
remote control repeatedly to toggle between the
following XM information display modes.
TUNING
MODE
Channel name/number
AUTO/MAN'L
Front panel
Channel category
or
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
Artist name/Song title
Remote control
When the channel number/name is displayed:
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
[040] Deep Tra
Sci-Fi
SP
A
PHONO
TUNER
XM
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
BASIC
OPERATION
When the channel category is displayed:
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
<CAT>Rock
Sci-Fi
SP
A
PHONO
TUNER
XM
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
When the artist name/song title is displayed:
V-AUX
SP
A
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
Coldplay / Clo
Sci-Fi
PHONO
TUNER
XM
AUTO
dB
VOLUME
L
R
y
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. If the information contains more than 14
characters, the information scrolls from right to left.
• If the information contains a character that cannot be
recognized by the unit, the character will be displayed with an
underbar “_”.
61
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
What is a sound field?
A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live
instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of
the room. In addition to making the sound live, these
reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated,
and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
Changing parameter settings
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room.
LEVEL
■ Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming
straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field:
AV
POWER
STANDBY
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
4,5
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
XM MEMORY
V-AUX
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
MD/TAPE
DVR/VCR2
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
EXTD. SUR
DVD
SELECT
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
EFFECT
CD-R
THX
SOURCE
TV
STANDARD
SELECT
5
6
7
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
FREQ/RDS
EON
2
3
8
A SPEAKERS B
+10
ENT.
MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
1
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RE–NAME
(U.S.A. model)
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional, and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
1
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
2
62
POWER
TV
RETURN
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall.
Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
POWER
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Turn on the video monitor and press ON
SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display
mode.
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
y
For details on selecting the OSD mode, see page 89.
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
3
Select the sound field program you want to
adjust.
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD. SUR
5
6
7
8
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
MOVIE
A SPEAKERS B
+10
ENT.
Sound field category
MUSIC
Cursor
.
Pop/Rock
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;21ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;31ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
Parameters
4
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost
in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet for more than one week.
■ Resetting parameters to the factory
values
To reset a certain parameter
Select the parameter you want to reset, then press l / h
repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter
name disappears from the video monitor.
To reset all parameters
Use PARAM. INI (see page 87).
Parameter values
Press k / n to select the parameters.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
5
Press l / h to change the parameter value.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
When you set a parameter to a value other than the
factory preset, an asterisk mark (*)
appears by the parameter name
on the video monitor.
6
Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to
change other program parameters.
Notes
• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one
OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,
press k / n.
• You cannot change parameter values when MEMORY GUARD
is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set
MEMORY GUARD to OFF (see page 86).
63
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous
concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to
AUTO (see page 43) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
Notes
• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.
For movie/video sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked MULTI
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked 2-CH can be used with 2-channel
(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to
select sound field programs, see “Basic operations” on page 36.
Source
Remote
control
button
1
3
Category
and
Program
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back
2-channel sources as is.
ENTERTAINMENT
TV Sports
CINEMA DSP processing. Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow,
the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall.
This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as
news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.
ENTERTAINMENT
Mono Movie
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is provided for reproducing monaural
video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum
reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field.
ENTERTAINMENT
Game
CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video
game sounds.
MOVIE THEATER
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field
of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail,
making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any
kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
(especially large-scale movie productions).
MOVIE THEATER
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound
effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad
and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films
in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.
MOVIE THEATER
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the
sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The
sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the
reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm
and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive
sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all
around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations
without losing clarity.
MULTI
2-CH
4
64
Features
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Source
MULTI
2-CH
Remote
control
button
5
MULTI
6
Features
THX
THX Cinema
THX processing for movie software.
THX
THX Game
THX processing for game software.
THX
THX Select2 Cinema
THX Select2 processing for movie software.
STANDARD
DOLBY DIGITAL
Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
STANDARD
q D+PLIIx Movie
Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
STANDARD
DOLBY D EX
Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
STANDARD
DTS
Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources.
STANDARD
DTS 96/24
Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
STANDARD
DTS+PLIIx Movie
Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic x) for DTS sources.
STANDARD
DTS+DOLBY EX
Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
STANDARD
DTS ES
Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete)
for DTS sources.
STANDARD
DTS 96/24 ES
Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete)
for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
STANDARD
Enhanced
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
STANDARD
PRO LOGIC
Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.
STANDARD
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.
STANDARD
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software.
STANDARD
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
STANDARD
Enhanced
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
2-CH
Category
and
Program
65
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
For music sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to
select sound field programs, see “Basic operations” on page 36.
Source
Remote
control
button
2 channel (left and right) playback.
STEREO
7ch Stereo
HiFi DSP processing. Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all
speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at
parties, etc.
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately
1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which
produce a very full, rich sound.
MUSIC
The Bttm Line
HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line,
a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in
a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
MUSIC
The Roxy Thtr
HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data
for this program was recorded at LA’s hottest rock club. The listener’s virtual seat
is at the center-left of the hall.
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets
you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.
3
ENTERTAINMENT
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively
disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is
also characterized by high-energy, immediate sound.
5
THX
THX Music
THX processing for all 5.1 encoded music sources.
STANDARD
q D+PLIIx Music
Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.
STANDARD
DTS+PLIIx Music
Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.
STANDARD
Enhanced
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
STANDARD
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.
STANDARD
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
2
MULTI
6
2-CH
66
Features
STEREO
2ch Stereo
1
MULTI
2-CH
Category
and
Program
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
■ DSP LEVEL (DSP level)
Function:
Description:
Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.
Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP
effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control Range: –6 dB to +3 dB
■ INIT. DLY / P. INIT. DLY (Initial delay)
Function:
Description:
Control range:
Changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay
between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the
farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.
1 to 99 ms
Source sound
Time
INIT. DLY
Level
Level
Level
Early
reflections
INIT. DLY
Time
INIT. DLY
Time
Sound source
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms
Large value = 99 ms
■ ROOM SIZE / P. ROOM SIZE (Room size)
Function:
Description:
Control range:
Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround
sound field becomes.
As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
0.1 to 2.0
Time
Early
reflections
Time
Level
Level
Level
Source sound
Time
Sound source
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
67
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
■ LIVENESS (Liveness)
Function:
Description:
Control range:
Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections
decay.
The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as dead, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as live.
The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the liveness of the
room.
0 to 10
Source sound
Time
Level
Level
Dead
Level
Live
Time
Small reflected
sound
Small value = 0
Time
Large reflected
sound
Large value = 10
■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay)
Function:
Control range:
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound
field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels
are used.
1 to 49 ms
■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size)
Function:
Control range:
Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
0.1 to 2.0
■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness)
Function:
Control range:
Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
0 to 10
■ SB. INIT. DLY (Surround back initial delay)
Function:
Control range:
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field.
1 to 49 ms
■ SB. ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size)
Function:
Control range:
Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.
0.1 to 2.0
■ SB. LIVENESS (Surround back liveness)
Function:
Control range:
68
Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.
0 to 10
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
■ REV. TIME (Reverberation time)
Function:
Description:
Control range:
Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB
(at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.
The longer the reverberation time, the more live the listening room environment seems. The shorter the
reverberation time, the more dead the listening room environment seems.
1.0 to 5.0 s
Source sound
Reverberation
Reverberation
Early reflections
60 dB
60 dB
REV.TIME
Sound source
REV.TIME
Short
reverberation
60 dB
REV.TIME
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level)
Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.
The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
0 to 100%
Source sound
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
Level
Function:
Description:
Control range:
REV. LEVEL
Time
■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation delay)
Description:
Control range:
Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the
reverberation sound.
The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.
0 to 250 ms
Level
Function:
Source sound
(dB)
60 dB
Reverberation
Time
REV.DELAY
REV.TIME
69
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
■ DIALOG LIFT (Dialog lift)
Function:
Description:
Choices:
Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center
channel elements to the presence speakers.
The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
For 7ch Stereo
Function:
Control range:
Adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.
0 to 100%
CT LEVEL (Center level)
SL LEVEL (Surround left level)
SR LEVEL (Surround right level)
SB LEVEL (Surround back level)
PL LEVEL (Presence left level)
PR LEVEL (Presence right level)
For PL x Music
PANORAMA (Panorama)
Function:
Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices:
OFF, ON
DIMENSION (Dimension)
Function:
Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard)
CENTER WIDTH (Center width)
Function:
Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only
from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3
For Neo:6 Music
CENTER IMAGE (Center image)
Function:
Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
70
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS
Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the following diagrams in the
table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program.
Note
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back.
Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as
special sound effects, etc.
The abbreviations and symbols used in each diagram are as follows:
L
Front left speaker
PL
Presence left speaker
SR
Surround right speaker
C
Center speaker
PR
Presence right speaker
SBL
Surround back left speaker
R
Front right speaker
SL
Surround left speaker
SBR
Surround back right speaker
Speaker from which sound is being output
Speaker from which no sound is being output
When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are turned off
When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and Priority is set to PRNS (see page 79)
*3 When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and Priority is set to SB (see page 79)
*1
*2
2-channel audio
(monaural)
PL
L
SL
STEREO
7ch Stereo
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
L
SL
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
R
SR
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
when surround back speakers are connected
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
when surround back speakers are not connected
71
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
STEREO
2ch Stereo
2-channel audio
(stereo)
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS
2-channel audio
(monaural)
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
The Bttm Line
The Roxy Thtr
ENTERTAINMENT
Disco
PL
L
SL
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
ENTERTAINMENT
Variety/Sports
Mono Movie
Game
SBL SBR
L
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PR
C
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
SR
SL
L
L
SR
SL
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
L
PL
L
SL
STANDARD
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
L
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
PL
SL
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SR
R
SR
R
SR
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
R
PR
C
PL
R
SR
PR
C
PL
R
R
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
PL
R
SR
PR
C
PL
R
L
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
PR
C
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
PL
R
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PRO LOGIC
72
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
PR
C
PL
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3
R
SR
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
PRO LOGIC
PR
C
PR
C
PL
R
PRO LOGIC
L
PL
R
PL
SL
MOVIE THEATER
Enhanced
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DTS
SBL SBR
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2
R
PR
C
PL
SL
THX
THX Game
SBL SBR
PL
R
THX
THX Select2
Cinema
THX Music
PR
C
PL
R
PL
R
PL
L
PR
C
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1
R
PL
R
PL
L
PL
R
PL
SL
THX
THX Cinema
THX Surround
EX
PR
C
2-channel audio
(stereo)
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PRO LOGIC
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS
2-channel audio
(monaural)
STANDARD
PLIIx Movie
PLII Music
PLII Game
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SL
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Movie/Game
PL
2-channel audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Movie/Music/Game
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Music
MOVIE THEATER
Enhanced
PLII Movie
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
When Priority is set
to PRNS
PL
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
L
R
SR
When Priority is set
to SB
STANDARD
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
Cinema
PL
L
SL
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Cinema/Music
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Music
73
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS
2-channel audio
(monaural)
MOVIE THEATER
Enhanced
Neo:6 Cinema
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
2-channel audio
(stereo)
PL
R
L
SR
SL
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
When Priority is set
to PRNS
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
When Priority is set
to SB
STRAIGHT
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
Monaural playback
PURE DIRECT
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
Monaural playback
74
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
R
SR
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
MANUAL SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to manually adjust a variety of system settings and customize the
way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your
listening environment.
y
You can run MANUAL SETUP using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD
illustrations to explain the MANUAL SETUP procedure.
1 BASIC MENU
Use to manually adjust basic system parameters.
Item
Features
Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output and the cross over
frequency.
78
B)SP LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
80
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
80
D)THX SET
Adjusts the THX settings.
81
E)TEST TONE
Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER SET, SP LEVEL and
SP DISTANCE settings.
81
2 SOUND MENU
Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or
projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 32).
y
Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 32). You can use
SOUND MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running AUTO SETUP first.
Item
Features
Page
Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker.
81
B)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
82
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
82
D)AUDIO SET
Adjusts the overall audio settings for this unit.
82
E)HDMI SET
Adjusts the HDMI support audio.
82
ADVANCED
OPERATION
A)EQUALIZER
3 INPUT MENU
Use to manually reassign digital input and output, select the input mode, rename your input, or specify external input
settings.
Item
Features
Page
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
83
B)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the input.
84
C)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
84
D)DECODER MODE
Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of
this unit.
84
E)MULTI CH SET
Adjusts the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a
source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
84
75
MANUAL SETUP
4 OPTION MENU
Use to manually adjust the optional system settings.
Item
Features
Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the settings for the OSD and the front panel display and converts video signals.
85
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.
86
C)AUDIO SELECT
Selects the type of input signal to be used.
86
D)DECODER MODE
Selects whether to initialize the settings or to recall the previous settings for the input mode
selected in INPUT MENU.
86
E)PARAM. INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
87
F)ZONE SET
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals on the rear panel of
this unit.
87
G)XM RADIO SET
Adjusts the XM Satellite Radio settings.
88
76
MANUAL SETUP
Using MANUAL SETUP
3
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
1
SOURCE
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
TV
Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu and
then press ENTER to enter the selected
menu item.
Repeat this operation to enter the setup mode of the
item you want to adjust.
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
TITLE
1,5
SRCH MODE
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
PRESET/CH
PURE DIRECT
MENU
BAND
2-4
SET MENU
ENTER
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
ON SCREEN
RETURN
A-E/CAT.
A-E/CAT.
EFFECT
XM MEMORY
STEREO
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD. SUR
5
6
7
8
9
0
+10
5
A SPEAKERS B
ENT.
(U.S.A. model)
4
y
Press l / h repeatedly to change the setting
of the item you want to adjust.
You can change the MANUAL SETUP parameters while the unit
is reproducing sound.
PRESET/CH
Note
ENTER
You cannot change some MANUAL SETUP parameters while
the unit is in either cinema or music night listening mode.
1
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
SET MENU to enter SET MENU.
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
A-E/CAT.
5
Press SET MENU (or press one of the sound
field program group buttons) to exit SET
MENU.
MENU
SRCH MODE
STEREO
TV
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
2
Press n to select MANUAL SETUP and then
press ENTER to enter the selected category.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD. SUR
5
6
7
8
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost
in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet for more than one week.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
or
SET MENU
;AUTO SETUP
. ;MANUAL SETUP
. ;INFORMATION
p
p
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
77
MANUAL SETUP
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
Using BASIC MENU
Use to manually adjust basic system parameters.
1 BASIC MENU 1/2
1 BASIC MENU 2/2
. E)TEST TONE
■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Note
Set any THX speakers to SML (small).
LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the
subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers
according to the characteristics of your system. This
setting also determines the routing of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS
sources.
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH
THX recommendation: SWFR
LFE/BASS OUT
[SWFR FRONT BOTH
• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and
low-frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.
• Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and
low frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the front speakers according to the speaker settings
(even if you have previously set front speakers to
SMALL).
• Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want
to output low-frequency signals from front channels to
both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and lowfrequency signals from other channels are also directed
to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use
this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using
the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs.
78
[SMALL
LARGE
p
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
p
. A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)THX SET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
FRONT SP
• Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front
channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT.
• Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The
unit directs the entire range of the front left and right
channel signals to the front left and right speakers.
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
CENTER SP
NONE [SML LRG
• Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The
unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front
left and right speakers.
• Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center
channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT.
• Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit
directs the entire range of the center channel signal to
the center speaker.
Surround L/R speakers SUR. L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
SUR. L/R SP
NONE [SML LRG
• Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.
This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 43) and automatically set SB L/R SP to
NONE.
• Select SML if you have small surround left and right
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
channel are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/
BASS OUT.
• Select LRG if you have large surround left and right
speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the
surround speakers. The entire range of the surround
channel signal is directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
MANUAL SETUP
Surround back speakers SB L/R SP
Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE
SB L/R SP
Bass cross over CROSS OVER
Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency
for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the
selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
THX recommendation: 80Hz
SMLx1 [SMLx2
CROSS OVER
• Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back
speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the surround back
speakers.
• Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back
speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the left surround back
speaker.
• Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channels are directed to the speakers selected in
LFE/BASS OUT.
• Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back
speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channel are directed to the speakers selected in
LFE/BASS OUT, and the rest of the frequency signals
are directed to the left surround back speaker.
• Select NONE if you do not have a surround back
speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back
channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.
FREQ;;;80Hz(THX)
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to
adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your
subwoofer.
Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE
• Select NORMAL not to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
• Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
SUBWOOFER PHASE
[NORMAL
REVERSE
Notes
• If you select LRGx1 or SMLx1, connect the speaker to the left
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
• NONE is automatically selected if BI-AMP is set to ON
(see page 91). This affects settings for SP LEVEL and SP
DISTANCE.
PRIORITY
PRESENCE SP
PRNS
[NONE
[SB
YES
• Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers.
• Select YES if you have presence speakers and want to
use them.
• Select PRNS to use presence speakers even when
surround back channel signals are input. The signals
for the surround back channel will be output from
surround speakers.
• Select SB to use surround back speakers when a
surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA
DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output
from front speakers.
79
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Presence speakers PRESENCE SP
Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers
connected to this unit.
Choices: NONE, YES
Priority PRIORITY
Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound
simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker
set when playing sources that contain surround back
channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field
programs.
Choices: PRNS, SB
MANUAL SETUP
■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL
Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left (or surround left) speaker and each
speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 78).
Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
B)SP LEVEL
. FR.L
FR.R
CENT.
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually input the distance of each
speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds arrive at the listening position at the same time.
+
C)SP DISTANCE
. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet
FRONTL;;;10.0ft
FRONTR;;;10.0ft
CENTER;;;;10.0ft
•
•
•
•
•
•
y
If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point
upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the
meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each
speaker to 75 dB.
Notes
• CENT. cannot be adjusted if CENTER SP is set to NONE (see
page 78).
• SUR. L and SUR. R cannot be adjusted if SB L/R SP is set to
NONE (see page 79).
• SB L and SB R can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to
either LRGx2 or SMLx2 (see page 79).
• SB can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to either LRGx1 or
SMLx1 (see page 79).
• SWFR cannot be adjusted if LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT
(see page 78).
• PR. L and PR. R cannot be adjusted if PRESENCE SP is set to
NONE (see page 79).
80
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
p
•
FR. L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker.
FR. R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker.
CENT. adjusts the balance of the center speaker.
SUR. L adjusts the balance of the surround left
speaker.
SUR. R adjusts the balance of the surround right
speaker.
SB L adjusts the balance of the surround back left
speaker.
SB R adjusts the balance of the surround back right
speaker.
SB adjusts the balance of the surround back speakers.
SWFR adjusts the balance of the subwoofer.
PR. L adjusts the balance of the presence left speaker.
PR. R adjusts the balance of the presence right
speaker.
p
•
•
•
•
p
p
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
• Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.
• Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Choices: 0.3 to 24.0 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.
• FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right
speaker.
• CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.
• SUR. L adjusts the distance of the surround left
speaker.
• SUR. R adjusts the distance of the surround right
speaker.
• SB L adjusts the distance of the surround back left
speaker.
• SB R adjusts the distance of the surround back right
speaker.
• SB adjusts the distance of the surround back speakers.
• SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer.
• PRNS L adjusts the distance of the presence left
speaker.
• PRNS R adjusts the distance of the presence right
speaker.
Notes
• CENTER cannot be adjusted if CENTER SP is set to NONE
(see page 78).
• SUR. L and SUR. R cannot be adjusted if SB L/R SP is set to
NONE (see page 79).
• SB L and SB R can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to
either LRGx2 or SMLx2 (see page 79).
• SB can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to either LRGx1 or
SMLx1 (see page 79).
• SWFR cannot be adjusted if LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT
(see page 78).
• PRNS L and PRNS R cannot be adjusted if PRESENCE SP is
set to NONE (see page 79).
MANUAL SETUP
■ THX set D)THX SET
Use to manually adjust the THX settings.
D)THX SET
SB DIST.
0.3-1.2m
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Using SOUND MENU
Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for
video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors
or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are
set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see
page 32).
2 SOUND MENU 1/2
Equalizer select SELECT
Choices: AUTO PEQ, GEQ, EQ OFF
A)EQUALIZER
. SELECT....GEQ
[<]/[>]:Adjust
[ENTER]:Enter
• Select AUTO PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in
AUTO SETUP (see page 32).
• Select GEQ to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic
equalizer.
• Select EQ OFF to completely deactivate both PEQ and
GEQ.
Notes
• If GEQ is selected, the OSD automatically changes to the
graphic equalizer screen as shown below.
• AUTO PEQ is automatically selected if you run AUTO SETUP
(see page 32).
Graphic equalizer GEQ
Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R
and surround back L/R, surround back and presence L/R
speakers with that of the front L/R speakers.
Choices: –6 to +6 (dB)
A)EQUALIZER
p
p
. CHANNEL;;FRONT L
+
63Hz
0.0dB
160Hz
0.0dB
400Hz
0.0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz,
1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz
Note
The GEQ parameter can be adjusted only if GEQ is selected in
SELECT.
81
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• This function is automatically turned off if you exit BASIC
MENU.
• If you select ON and enter the SPEAKER SET, SP LEVEL or
SP DISTANCE menu, the test tone is output from the selected
speakers.
p
Notes
p
y
If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arm’s length and point
upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the
meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each
speaker to 75 dB.
p
[<]/[>]:Select
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic
equalizer (GEQ).
Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER
SET, SP LEVEL and SP DISTANCE settings.
Choices: ON, OFF
E)TEST TONE
. E)HDMI SET
■ Graphic equalizer A)EQUALIZER
■ Test tone E)TEST TONE
TEST TONE;;;;OFF
2 SOUND MENU 2/2
. A)EQUALIZER
B)LFE LEVEL
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
D)AUDIO SET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
Surround back speaker distance SB DIST.
Use this feature to optimize the surround sound field when
you have to place the surround back L/R speakers apart.
Choices: under 0.3m, 0.3 – 1.2m, over 1.2m
(under 1ft, 1 – 4ft, over 4ft)
• Select under 0.3m (under 1ft) if the distance between
the surround back L/R speakers is less than 0.3 m (1 ft).
• Select 0.3 – 1.2m (1 – 4ft) if the distance between the
surround back L/R speakers is between 0.3 and 1.2 m
(between 1 and 4 ft).
• Select over 1.2m (over 4ft) if the distance between the
surround back L/R speakers is more than 1.2 m (4 ft).
MANUAL SETUP
Test tone TEST
Turns the test tone output on or off to compare the tonal
quality of the center, surround L/R, surround back L/R,
surround back and presence L/R speakers with that of the
front L/R speakers.
Choices: ON, OFF
■ Audio set D)AUDIO SET
Use to customize the overall audio settings for this unit.
D)AUDIO SET
■ Low-frequency effect level
B)LFE LEVEL
Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain
scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Choices: –20 to 0 (dB)
B)LFE LEVEL
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
p
p
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Speaker LFE level SPEAKER
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone LFE level HEADPHONE
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
p
p
. MUTE TYPE;;;FULL
A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms
TONE BYPASS;AUTO
LE>E
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Muting type MUTE TYPE
Use to adjust how much the muting function reduces the
sound output.
Choices: FULL, –20 dB
• Select FULL to completely halt all output of sound.
• Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio Delay A.DELAY
Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the
video image. This may be necessary when using certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Choices: 0 to 240 (ms)
Tone bypass TONE BYPASS
Use to automatically bypass the tone control when BASS
and TREBLE are set to 0 dB.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select AUTO to automatically bypass the tone control
when BASS and TREBLE are set to 0 dB.
• Select OFF not to bypass the tone control at any time.
Note
■ HDMI set E)HDMI SET
Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not
be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack.
Use to adjust the HDMI support audio.
■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use to select the amount of dynamic range to be applied to
your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only
when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),
MAX (maximum)
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
. SP: MIN STD[MAX
HP: MIN STD[MAX
p
p
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Speaker SP
Select to adjust the dynamic range of speakers.
Headphone HP
Select to adjust the dynamic range of headphones.
• Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume levels.
• Select STD for general use.
• Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of
dynamic range.
82
E)HDMI SET
SUPPORT AUDIO:
RX-V1600
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO
Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on
this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the
HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.
Choices: RX-V1600, OTHER
• Select RX-V1600 to play back HDMI audio signals on
this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI
IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the
rear panel of this unit.
• Select OTHER to play back HDMI audio signals on
another HDMI component.
Note
The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2
jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this
unit.
MANUAL SETUP
Using INPUT MENU
Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode
or rename your inputs.
3 INPUT MENU 1/2
3 INPUT MENU 2/2
. E)MULTI CH SET
OPTICAL IN 1/2
. (4);;;;;
(
(5);;;;;
(
(6);;;;;
(
CD
CD
DVD
DVD
DTV
DTV
OPTICAL IN 2/2
)
. (7);;;;;CBL/SAT
(CBL/SAT)
)
)
p
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
p
. A)I/OASSIGNMENT
B)INPUT RENAME
C)VOLUME TRIM
D)DECODER MODE
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
Optical input OPTICAL IN
Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV,
CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2
■ Input/output assignment
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
You can assign jacks according to the component to be
used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your
needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the
respective jacks and effectively connect more components.
Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on
the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote
control.
Note
The default settings are displayed with parentheses in the OSD.
Component video input CMPNT-V INPUT
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,
V-AUX
CMPNT-V INPUT
Optical output OPTICAL OUT
Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV,
CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX
OPTICAL OUT
. (8);;;;;MD/TAPE
(MD/TAPE)
(9);;;;; CD-R
( CD-R )
HDMI input HDMI IN
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,
V-AUX
HDMI IN
. IN1;;;;; DVD
( DVD )
IN2;;;;;CBL/SAT
(CBL/SAT)
. [A];;;;; DVD
( DVD )
[B];;;;; DTV
( DTV )
[C];;;;;CBL/SAT
(CBL/SAT)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Coaxial input COAXIAL IN
Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV,
CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX
COAXIAL IN
. (1);;;;;
CD
(
CD )
(2);;;;;
DVD
(
DVD )
(3);;;;;DVR/VCR2
(DVR/VCR2)
Notes
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the
COAXIAL jack.
83
MANUAL SETUP
■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the
OSD and front panel display.
B)INPUT RENAME
DVD
->
■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE
Use to switch the input mode. You can designate the
reassigned digital input jacks for specific audio signals
(DTS, etc.).
Choices: AUTO, DTS
DVD
D)DECODER MODE
.
p
p
p
1
Press an input selector button to select the
input you want to change the name of.
2
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
3
Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or the character you want to edit.
4
Press k / n to select the character you want
to use and l / h to move to the next one.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
• Press n to change the character in the following
order, or press k to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, space, 0 to 9, space, a to z, space, #, *, +,
etc.
5
■ Multi CH Setup E)MULTI CH SET
Use to set the direction of the signals input into the center,
subwoofer and surround channels when a source
component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
If you input 8-channel signals from an external decoder,
use this feature to select jacks for the additional front
signals.
E)MULTI CH SET
. INPUT CH;;;;;6CH
FRONT;;;;;;;;DVD
Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each
input.
C)VOLUME TRIM
.
p
p
PHONO
0.0dB
CD
0.0dB
CD-R
0.0dB
MD/TAPE
0.0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Note
You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using
this setting.
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
p
Press ENTER or RETURN on the remote
control to exit from the INPUT RENAME
menu.
■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM
Use to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This
is useful if you want to balance the level of each input
source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching
between input sources.
Choices: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
84
• Select AUTO if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
• Select DTS if you want this unit to select DTS as the
input mode.
p
6
p
CD ;;;;AUTO
DVD ;;;;AUTO
DTV ;;;;AUTO
CBL/SAT ;;;;AUTO
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
[<]/[>]:Position
[]/[]:Chara.
INPUT CH
Use this setting to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder.
Choices: 6CH, 8CH
• Select 6CH if you input 6-channel signals.
• Select 8CH if you input 8-channel signals.
Note
If ZONE2 AMP is set to SUR, PRNS or BOTH (see page 87), no
sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you
select 8CH. In this case, select 6CH and set the output setting of
the external component to 6 channels.
FRONT
If you selected 8ch in INPUT CH, you can select analog
jacks at which front signals from an external decoder will
be input.
Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT,
VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX
MANUAL SETUP
Using OPTION MENU
Use to manually adjust the optional system settings.
4 OPTION MENU 1/2
4 OPTION MENU 2/2
. E)PARAM. INI
F)ZONE SET
G)XM RADIO SET
p
p
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
. A)DISPLAYSET
B)MEMORY GUARD
C)AUDIO SELECT
D)DECODER MODE
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET
Use this feature to adjust the display settings.
Video conversion V CONV.
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the component
interlace/progressive conversion as well as the HDMI
interlace/progressive up-conversion of the analog video
signals input at the composite video, S-video and
component video jacks.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select ON to activate the component interlace/
progressive conversion as well as the HDMI interlace/
progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.
• Select OFF to deactivate the component interlace/
progressive conversion as well as the HDMI interlace/
progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.
y
Note
The parameter settings for DISPLAY SET (except for the
DIMMER setting) can be initialized to the factory presets. Use
the V-RESET feature in the ADVANCED SETUP menu (see
page 91).
A)DISPLAY SET
p
p
. DIMMER;;;;;;;0
OSD SHIFT;;;;0
GRAY BACK;AUTO
V CONV.;;;;;ON
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Dimmer DIMMER
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Choices: –4 to 0
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)
Initial setting: 0
• Press h to lower the position of the OSD.
• Press l to raise the position of the OSD.
Notes
• The OSD is not displayed when V CONV. is set to OFF.
• Even when V CONV. is set to ON, HDMI digital signals are not
converted to analog video signals.
• If V CONV. is set to OFF, the CMPNT I/P and HDMI I/P
features are deactivated.
• Converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video
connections (composite or S-video) between each component.
• When converting composite video or S-video signals from a
VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer
depending on your VCR.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video, S-video or
component video jacks cannot be converted even if V CONV. is
set to ON.
• If unconventional signals are being input at the composite
video, S-video or component video jacks, the video output may
be abnormal as a result. In such cases, set V CONV. to OFF.
Component interlace/progressive conversion
CMPNT I/P
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog I/P
conversion of the analog video signals input at the
composite video, S-video and component video jacks so
that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i to
480p are output at the MONITOR OUT jacks.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select ON to activate the analog I/P conversion of the
analog video signals.
• Select OFF to deactivate the analog I/P conversion of
the analog video signals.
Notes
• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the
OSD if V CONV. is set to OFF.
• If your video monitor does not support the analog video signals
with 480p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be
displayed on your video monitor when CMPNT I/P is set to
ON.
85
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Gray back GRAY BACK
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select AUTO to display a gray background in the OSD
when there is no video signal being input.
• Select OFF not to display a gray background even
when there is no video signal being input.
When using the THX system, we recommend setting V CONV. to
OFF.
MANUAL SETUP
HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion
HDMI I/P
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI I/P upconversion of the analog video signals input at the
composite video, S-video and component video jacks so
that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i to
480p are output at the HDMI OUT jack.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select ON to activate the HDMI I/P up-conversion of
the analog video signals.
• Select OFF to deactivate the HDMI I/P up-conversion
of the analog video signals.
■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT
Notes
• Select AUTO if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate input mode.
• Select LAST if you want this unit to automatically
select the last input mode used for the connected input
source.
• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the
OSD if V CONV. is set to OFF.
• When the analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution
are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack,
the picture quality may worsen.
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: ON, OFF
B)MEMORY GUARD
[ON
OFF
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Use this feature to designate the default input mode for the
input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks
when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
C)AUDIO SELECT
[AUTO
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Note
Selecting LAST does not recall the last setting for the EXTD
SUR. button.
■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for
the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks
when you turn on the power of this unit. See page 43 for
details about the input mode.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
D)DECODER MODE
• Select ON to protect the following system parameters.
– DSP program parameters
– All SET MENU items except MEMORY GUARD
– All speaker levels
– The on-screen display (OSD) mode
• Select OFF to deactivate the memory guard feature.
Notes
• When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot use the test
tone or select any other SET MENU items.
• When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, “MEMORY
GUARD!” appears in the OSD and in the front panel display
when you try to adjust the protected system parameters.
LAST
[AUTO
LAST
[<]/[>]:Adjust
• Select AUTO to if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate decoder mode.
• Select LAST to if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder mode used for the connected
input source.
Note
Selecting LAST does not recall the last setting for the EXTD
SUR. button.
86
MANUAL SETUP
■ Parameter initialization E)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field
program that you want to initialize.
An asterisk (*) next to a program name means that the
parameter values have been changed from their initial
settings.
E)PARAM. INI
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE THEATER
*SURROUND
PRESS DSP KEY
Notes
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY
GUARD is set to ON.
■ Zone set F)ZONE SET
F)ZONE SET
p
p
SP B;;;;;;;;MAIN
ZONE2 VOL;;;;VAR
ZONE3 VOL;;;;VAR
ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
Notes
• If you select ZONE B and connect headphones to the PHONES
jack on the unit, the sound is output from both headphones and
SPEAKERS B.
• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters
the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
Zone 3 volume ZONE3 VOL
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks.
Choices: VAR, FIX
• Select VAR to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume
simultaneously with VOLUME +/– on the remote
control.
• Select FIX to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume level
to a standard line level.
Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP
Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified.
Choices: EXT, SUR, PRNS, BOTH
• Select EXT if you want to connect your Zone 2
speakers through an external amplifier connected to the
ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select SUR to use the internal surround amplifier of
this unit if you want to connect your Zone 2 speakers
directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker
terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select PRNS to use the internal surround back
amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone
2 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)
speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select BOTH to use the internal surround and surround
back amplifiers of this unit if you want to connect your
Zone 2 speakers directly to both the PRESENCE/
ZONE 2(3) and the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker
terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
Notes
• If BI-AMP is set to ON in the ADVANCED SETUP menu,
SUR, PRNS and BOTH cannot be selected.
• Zone 2 and Zone 3 cannot use the same amplifier at the same
time. If BOTH is selected for ZONE2 AMP, for instance, only
EXT can be selected for ZONE3 AMP and vice versa.
• The Intelligent Power AMP Assign feature of this unit becomes
in effect in the following cases so that the surround and
surround back amplifiers of this unit are automatically assigned
to the main room for the use of the surround back speakers
connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals in the
7.1-channel system.
– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to PRNS and
EXT respectively and Zone 2 is turned off
– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to EXT and
PRNS respectively and Zone 3 is turned off
• If either ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP is set to SUR or PRNS,
the speaker system of the main room is limited to 3.1 or
2.1-channel playback no matter when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is
turned off because the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker
terminals are used for the zone connection.
87
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Speakers B SP B
Use to specify the location of speakers connected the
SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: MAIN, ZONE B
• Select MAIN to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when
the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals
are set in the main room.
• Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If
SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is
turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound
from SPEAKERS B only.
Zone 2 volume ZONE2 VOL
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.
Choices: VAR, FIX
• Select VAR to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume
simultaneously with VOLUME +/– on the remote
control.
• Select FIX to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level
to a standard line level.
MANUAL SETUP
G)XM RADIO SET
. XM DISPLAY;;;10S
XM ANTENNA;;NONE
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
p
Notes
• If BI-AMP is set to ON in the ADVANCED SETUP menu,
SUR, PRNS and BOTH cannot be selected.
• Zone 2 and Zone 3 cannot use the same amplifier at the same
time. If BOTH is selected for ZONE2 AMP, for instance, only
EXT can be selected for ZONE3 AMP and vice versa.
• The Intelligent Power AMP Assign feature of this unit becomes
in effect in the following cases so that the surround and
surround back amplifiers of this unit are automatically assigned
to the main room for the use of the surround back speakers
connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals in the
7.1-channel system.
– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to PRNS and
EXT respectively and Zone 2 is turned off
– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to EXT and
PRNS respectively and Zone 3 is turned off
• If either ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP is set to SUR or PRNS,
the speaker system of the main room is limited to 3.1 or
2.1-channel playback no matter when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is
turned off because the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker
terminals are used for the zone connection.
■ XM Satellite Radio set G)XM RADIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the XM Satellite Radio settings.
p
Zone 3 amplifier ZONE3 AMP
Use to select how the ZONE 3 speakers will be amplified.
Choices: EXT, SUR, PRNS, BOTH
• Select EXT if you want to connect your Zone 3
speakers through an external amplifier connected to the
ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select SUR to use the internal surround amplifier of
this unit if you want to connect your Zone 3 speakers
directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker
terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select PRNS to use the internal surround back
amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone
3 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)
speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select BOTH to use the internal surround and surround
back amplifiers of this unit if you want to connect your
Zone 3 speakers directly to both the PRESENCE/
ZONE 2(3) and the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker
terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
Display DISPLAY
Use this feature if you want to display the XM Satellite
Radio information in the OSD for a certain amount of
time.
Choices: ON, 10S, 30S, OFF
• Select ON to display the XM Satellite Radio
information in the OSD.
• Select 10S to set the amount of time for the XM
Satellite Radio information to be displayed for 10
seconds.
• Select 30S to set the amount of time for the XM
Satellite Radio information to be displayed for 30
seconds.
• Select OFF not to display the XM Satellite Radio
information in the OSD.
Antenna ANTENNA
Use this feature if you want to display the XM Satellite
Radio reception level.
Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%
• If the displayed percentage of the reception level is
below the average (approximately 60%), you need to
adjust the orientation of the XM Satellite Radio
antenna for a better percentage of the reception level.
• If NONE is displayed, the XM Satellite Radio antenna
may not be firmly connected to the XM jack on the rear
panel of this unit. Check the XM Satellite Radio
connection.
Note
The ANTENNA parameter cannot be adjusted by using the
remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the
XM Satellite Radio antenna for a better percentage of the
reception level.
88
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
You can switch between the available OSD modes and manually adjust the output level of each speaker.
Selecting the OSD mode
You can display the operating information of this unit on a
video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound
field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much
easier to see the available options and parameters than it is
to read the information in the front panel display.
Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit
and then press ON SCREEN on the remote
control repeatedly to change the OSD mode.
The OSD mode changes in the following order:
Full display → Short display → Display off
Adjusting speaker levels
You can manually adjust the output level of each speaker
while listening to a music source. This is also possible
when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks.
Note
This operation will override the level adjustments made in AUTO
SETUP (see page 32) and SP LEVEL (see page 80).
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
SOURCE
Full display
2
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
TV
1
PURE DIRECT
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
A-E/CAT.
Short display
ON SCREEN
RETURN
STRAIGHT
3
DISPLAY
EFFECT
XM MEMORY
(U.S.A. model)
Display off
Full display
Fully shows the sound field program parameter settings as
well as the contents of the front panel display.
1
AMP
SOURCE
Short display
Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the
bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit.
MUSIC
.
Pop/Rock
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;21ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;31ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
Full display
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
Short display
Notes
• The OSD signal is not output at the OUT (REC) jack and will
not be recorded.
• You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is no
video signal being input by setting GRAY BACK to AUTO
(see page 85).
• The OSD is not displayed in the following cases:
– When video signals in the progressive format or HDTV video
signals are being input.
– When the signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack
are being output at the HDMI OUT jack.
– When V CONV. is set to OFF (see page 85).
TV
2
Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker you want to adjust.
LEVEL
TITLE
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Display off
Only the operations performed using ON SCREEN on the
remote control are displayed. However, the OSD is
displayed when using SET MENU or the test tone feature
even if the OSD mode is turned off.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
BAND
FRONT L adjusts the front left speaker level.
CENTER adjusts the center speaker level.
FRONT R adjusts the front right speaker level.
SUR.R adjusts the surround right speaker level.
SB R adjusts the surround back right speaker level.
SB L adjusts the surround back left speaker level.
SUR.L adjusts the surround left speaker level.
SWFR adjusts the subwoofer level.
PRNS L adjusts the presence left speaker level.
PRNS R adjusts the presence right speaker level.
3
Press l / h to adjust the speaker output
level.
Control range: +10 dB to –10 dB
89
ADVANCED SETUP
ADVANCED SETUP
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The ADVANCED SETUP menu offers
additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold
under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Using ADVANCED SETUP
1
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to set
this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby
mode.
4
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
5
MASTER
ON
2
OFF
Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on the
power of this unit.
MASTER
STRAIGHT
ON
EFFECT
3
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to change the setting.
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and set this unit, Zone 2 and
Zone 3 to the standby mode.
MASTER
ON
OFF
y
The new setting is activated next time you press
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on the
power of this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3.
OFF
Notes
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select the parameter you want to
adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
See pages 90 and 91 for a complete list of available
parameters.
• The control buttons on the remote control and VOLUME as
well as the other control buttons on the front panel except
MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the
PROGRAM selector are ineffective while you are using the
ADVANCED SETUP menu.
• Zone 2, Zone 3 and the speaker relay are all turned off and all
audio and video output is muted while you are using the
ADVANCED SETUP menu.
• The ADVANCED SETUP menu is only available in the front
panel display.
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
PROGRAM
Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that
of your speakers.
Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN
• Select 6ΩMIN for speakers with 6 ohms or higher.
• Select 8ΩMIN for speakers with 8 ohms or higher.
ADVANCED SETUP
SP IMP.-8 MIN
Name of the selected parameter
Current setting
■ User preset PRESET
Use to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial
factory settings with the exception of System Memory and
AUTO SETUP settings.
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select CANCEL if you do not want to reset the
parameters of this unit.
• Select RESET to reset the parameters of this unit.
Notes
• This setting does not affect the ADVANCED SETUP menu
item parameters.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
the power of this unit.
90
ADVANCED SETUP
■ Remote sensor REMOTE SEN
Use to activate or deactivate the signal-receiving
capability of the remote control sensor on the front panel
of this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select ON if you want to activate the signal-receiving
capability of the remote control sensor.
• Select OFF if you want to deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor.
■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM
(U.S.A. model only)
Note
Note
We recommend setting this parameter to ON in most cases.
You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the
remote control.
■ Wake on RS-232C access WAKE ON 232C
Use to switch the XM-related remote control codes
between ID1 and ID2.
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select ID1 when the remote control XM library code is
set to 2604.
• Select ID2 when the remote control XM library code is
set to 2605.
Use to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C
interface when this unit is in the standby mode.
Choices: Y (yes), N (no)
• Select Y set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C
interface.
• Select N set this unit not to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.
■ Fan operation mode FAN MODE
■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP
■ Tuner frequency step TU
(Asia and General models only)
Use to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control
recognition (see page 95).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select ID1 when the remote control AMP library code
is set to 2001.
• Select ID2 when the remote control AMP library code
is set to 2002.
Use to set the operation of the cooling fan of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, CONT.
• Select AUTO to set the fan to operate automatically
according to the temperature of this unit.
• Select CONT. to set the fan to operate continuously
regardless of the temperature of this unit.
Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the
frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
• Select AM10/FM100 for North, Central and South
America.
• Select AM9/FM50 for all other areas.
Note
■ Bi-AMP BI-AMP
You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the
remote control.
Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select ON if you want to activate the bi-AMP function.
• Select OFF if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP
function.
■ Remote control tuner ID REMOTE TUN
When BI-AMP is set to ON, the SURROUND BACK terminals
cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the
SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the bi-AMP
connection (see page 19).
Note
■ Video reset V-RESET
You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the
remote control.
Use to initialize the parameter settings for DISPLAY SET
in OPTION MENU (see page 85). This feature is useful if
the SET MENU items are not displayed on your video
monitor due to a technical error between the CMPNT I/P
setting and the capability of your video monitor. That is, if
your video monitor does not support the analog video
signals with 480p of resolution, the SET MENU items
may not be displayed on your video monitor when
CMPNT I/P is set to ON (see page 85).
Choices: YES, CANCEL
Note
Note
The parameter setting for DIMMER is not initialized (see
page 85).
91
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use to set the tuner ID of this unit for remote control
recognition (see page 95).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select ID1 when the remote control tuner library code
is set to 2602.
• Select ID2 when the remote control tuner library code
is set to 2603.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by
YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the
appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire
functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.
Control area
■ Controlling this unit
■ Controlling other components
The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the
AMP mode.
The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected components. Select the
component you want to control by pressing an input
selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the
selected component appears in the display window.
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
TV
AV
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
Display
window
SELECT
AMP
AMP/SOURCE/
TV
Set to AMP to
operate this unit.
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
SOURCE
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
TV
The buttons inside
the dotted lines
control this unit in
any mode (POWER,
STANDBY,
SLEEP, AUDIO
SEL, the input
selector buttons,
VOLUME +/–,
MUTE,
STRAIGHT
(EFFECT) and
PURE DIRECT).
The A and input
selector buttons
switch the function
of the component
control area below.
* Use the A buttons
to control other
components
regardless of whether
they are connected to
this unit.
Factory setting:
A...Tape deck
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
A
B
AUDIO SELECT
SLEEP
POWER
POWER
MULTI
AV CH IN
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
TVCD
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
PURE DIRECT
SELECT
NIGHT
AMP
AUDIO
ENTER
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOL
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
SOURCE
A-E/CAT.
ON SCREEN
RETURN
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
EFFECT
XM MEMORY
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
FREQ/RDS
EON
PRESET
ENT.
MODE PTY SEEK START
+
MUTE
TV VOL
EXIT
MENU
BAND
PRG SELECT
CH
PURE DIRECT
–
TITLE
–
TV MUTE
Display
window
A SPEAKERS B
+10
TV
+
TOP
ENTER
TVNIGHT
INPUT
AUDIO
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
TITLE
MENU
STRAIGHT SRCH MODE
BAND
RETURN
DISPLAY
NIGHT
REC
EFFECT
ENTER
STEREO
DISC SKIP
OFF
SELECT k / n
switches control to
another component
without changing
the input source on
this unit.
POWER
STANDBY
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RE–NAME
(U.S.A. model)
Component
control area
You can control up
to 14 different
components by
setting appropriate
remote control
codes (see page 94).
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
STANDARD RETURN
SELECT
THX
5
6
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
FREQ/RDS
EON
REC
4
ON SCREEN
EXTD. SUR DISPLAY
XM MEMORY
7
STEREO
AUDIO
MOVIE
A-E/CAT.
8
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
1 A SPEAKERS2 B
ENT.
+10
MOVIE
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
MODE PTY SEEK START
A SPEAKERS B
+10
ENT.
AMP/
SOURCE/
TV
Set to
SOURCE to
operate the
component
selected with
an input
selector
button.
Set to TV to
operate the
television
(you must set
the remote
control code
in DTV or
PHONO).
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
EON
MODE PTY SEEK START
RE–NAME
REC
DISC SKIP
(U.S.A. model)
■ Controlling optional components (OPTN area)
OPTN is an additional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro
function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code.
To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until OPTN appears in the display window.
Note
You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 96 to program buttons operated within this component control area.
92
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Controlling each component
Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you
can use this remote to control your other components.
Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the
selected component. Use the input selector buttons to
select the component you want to operate. The remote
control automatically switches to the appropriate control
mode for that component.
1
2
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOL
–
–
–
TV INPUT
MUTE
SOURCE
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
A
XM
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
TV MUTE
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
NIGHT
A-E/CAT.
RETURN
+
DISPLAY
EFFECT
XM MEMORY
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
EXTD SUR.
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
5
6
7
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
FREQ/RDS
EON
AMP
+
STRAIGHT
ON SCREEN
8
SELECT
AUDIO
ENTER
7
DVD
PURE DIRECT
MENU
SRCH MODE
BAND
6
TV
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
TV MUTE
4
LEVEL
TV INPUT
9
TV
+10
ENT.
SET MENU
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
B
MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
MUTE
PRESET/CH
TITLE
A
8
A SPEAKERS B
SOURCE
3
0
DISC SKIP
PURE DIRECT
NIGHT
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RE–NAME
5
AUDIO
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
(U.S.A. model)
RETURN
DISPLAY
EFFECT
STEREO
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
A
B
*1
*2
*3
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
DVD player/
VCR
DVD recorder
Cable TV/
TV
Satellite tuner
LD player
CD player
MD recorder/
CD recorder
Tape deck
Tuner
AV POWER
Power *1
Power *1
Power *1
VCR power *3
Power *1
Power *1
Power *1
Power *1
Power *1
TV POWER
TV power *2
TV power *2
TV power *2
Power *1
TV power *2
TV power *2
TV power *2
TV power *2
TV power *2
TV VOL +
TV volume + *2
TV volume + *2
Volume +
TV volume + *2
TV volume + *2
TV volume + *2
TV volume + *2
TV volume + *2
TV VOL –
TV volume –
*2
*2
Volume –
TV volume –
*2
*2
*2
*2
TV volume – *2
CH +
TV channel + *2
Channel +
Channel +
Channel +
TV channel + *2
TV channel + *2
TV channel + *2
TV channel + *2
TV channel + *2
CH –
TV channel – *2
Channel –
Channel –
Channel –
TV channel – *2
TV channel – *2
TV channel – *2
TV channel – *2
TV channel – *2
TV INPUT
TV input *2
TV input *2
TV input *2
Input
TV input *2
TV input *2
TV input *2
TV input *2
TV input *2
TV MUTE
TV mute *2
TV mute *2
TV mute *2
Mute
TV mute *2
TV mute *2
TV mute *2
TV mute *2
TV mute *2
TITLE
Title
Title
Title
Title
MENU
Menu
Menu
Menu
ENTER
Menu enter
Menu select
Menu select
k
Menu up
Menu up
Menu up
Preset up
(1 to 8)
n
Menu down
Menu down
Menu down
Preset down
(1 to 8)
l
Menu left
Menu left
Menu left
Preset down
(A to E)
h
Menu right
Menu right
Menu right
RETURN
Return
Return
Return
Return
1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
ll
Search
backward
Search
backward
VCR search
backward *3
VCR search
backward *3
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
hh
Search forward Search forward
VCR search
forward *3
VCR search
forward *3
Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward
b
Skip backward
Chapter/Skip
backward
Skip backward
Skip backward
Direction back
a
Skip forward
Chapter/Skip
forward
Skip forward
Skip forward
Direction
forward
REC/
DISC SKIP
Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec
VCR rec *3
VCR rec *3
Disc skip
Rec
Rec
s
Stop
Stop
VCR stop *3
VCR stop *3
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
e
Pause
Pause
VCR pause *3
VCR pause *3
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
h
Play
Play
VCR play *3
VCR play *3
Play
Play
Play
Play
AUDIO
Audio
DISPLAY
Display
Display
Display
ENTER
TV volume –
TV
volume + *2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
TV volume –
TV volume –
Band
Direction A/B
Preset up
(A to E)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
7
8
9
MUSIC
Search
backward
Audio
Enter
Display
Display
Enter/recall
Enter/
numeric button
Display
This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO.
When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area.
These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1.
93
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Setting remote control codes
3
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available remote
control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL
CODES” at the end of this manual.
Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the selected
component name (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the
display window.
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each input area.
LEARN
Remote control code default settings
y
Input area
Library
(component
category)
Default YAMAHA
code
A
TAPE
2700
XM
TUNER
2604
Notes
PHONO
TV
–
TUNER
TUNER
2602
CD
CD
2300
MULTI CH
INPUT
DVD
2102
V-AUX
VCR
–
CBL/SAT
CABLE
–
MD/TAPE
MD
2500
CD-R
CD-R
2400
DTV
TV
–
VCR 1
VCR
–
DVR/VCR2
DVR
2807
DVD
DVD
2102
Note
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.
In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.
1
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2
94
Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to set up.
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
If you want to setup for another component, press the input
selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component.
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
4
If you want to change a library (component
category), press l / h. You can set a
different type of component.
Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD,
L;CDR, L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),
L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable), L;SAT (satellite),
L;VCR
Notes
• The tuner library (L;TUN) code is preset in the TUNER
and XM buttons in order to operate this unit. The initial
settings for the TUNER and XM buttons are 2602 and
2604 respectively. However, you can switch the tuner
library code by entering one of the following codes if
necessary.
• The AMP library (L;AMP) code is preset to 2001 in order
to operate this unit. However, you can switch the AMP
library code by entering one of the following codes if
necessary.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Setting remote control AMP codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
AMP code for the component you want to use.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE and then
change the remote control code settings.
AMP library
code
(remote
control
setting)
Function
Remote
control
AMP ID
Setting remote control XM codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
XM code for the component you want to use.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and press XM on the
remote control to select XM as the input source and then
change the remote control code settings.
XM library
code
(this unit’s
setting:
see page 91)
To operate this unit using
2001
the default code.
ID1
(initial setting) To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 (initial setting)
features (see page 104).
2002
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3
features (see page 104).
2604
To operate this unit using
(initial setting) the default code.
2603
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
• You need to set the corresponding remote control XM ID
(see page 91).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
5
Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected component
appears in the display window.
Note
0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set.
6
Remote
control
tuner ID
(this unit’s
setting:
see page 91)
Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the
component you want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
ID1
(initial setting)
ID2
Notes
• You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID
(see page 91).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
7
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
THX
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
1
MEMORY 2
9
0
7
MOVIE
8
A SPEAKERS B
+10
ENT.
Press ENTER to set the number.
OK appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
NG appears in the display window if the setting was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press the input selector button or
SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4
through 6.
95
ADVANCED
OPERATION
2602
To operate this unit using
(initial setting) the default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
Notes
Setting remote control tuner codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
tuner code for the component you want to use.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and press TUNER
on the remote control to select TUNER as the input source
and then change the remote control code settings.
Function
(this unit’s
setting:
see page 91)
ID2
• You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID
(see page 91).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
(remote
control
setting)
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
2605
Notes
Tuner
library code
Function
(remote
control
setting)
Remote
control XM
ID
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
8
Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
LEARN
9
Press one of the buttons shaded below to
see if you can control your component. If you
can, the remote control code is correct.
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
A
XM
STANDBY
POWER
FREQ/RDS
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
EON
MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
CD
MULTI CH IN
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX
DTV
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RE–NAME
(U.S.A. model)
Using LEARN
You can program remote control codes from other remote
controls. Use the LEARN feature if you want to program
functions not included in the basic operations covered by
the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control
code is not available. You can program any of the buttons
available in the component control area (see page 92). The
buttons can be programmed independently for each
component.
Note
This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some
special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the
operating instructions for the other remote control.)
1
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
y
AMP
If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.
SOURCE
TV
Notes
• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than
one button simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the Learn feature (see “Using LEARN”)
or use the remote control supplied with the component.
• Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over
remote control code functions.
2
Press an input selector button to select a
source component.
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
(U.S.A. model)
3
Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control
on a flat surface so that their infrared
transmitters are aimed at each other.
XM
AV
CD
AUDIO SEL
DVD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
POWER
TV
TUNER
MD/TAPE
STANDBY
A
DVR/VCR2
POWER
PHONO
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
POWER
DTV
V-AUX
SELECT
(U.S.A. model)
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
96
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
4
Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
LEARN and the selected component name (ex. DVD)
appear alternately in the display window.
7
Press LEARN again to exit the learning
mode.
LEARN
Notes
LEARN
Notes
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control
code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
5
Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
LEARN appears in the display window.
CD
AUDIO SEL
STANDBY
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
POWER
AV
XM
POWER
TUNER
DVD
CD-R
TV
A
MD/TAPE
POWER
PHONO
DVR/VCR2
AMP
SELECT
TV
SOURCE
VCR 1
+
CBL/SAT
–
VOLUME
DTV
+
V-AUX
–
CH
AUDIO
NIGHT
PURE DIRECT
–
MUTE
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
+
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
ENTER
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
TV VOL
TV MUTE
TITLE
LEVEL
BAND
A-E/CAT.
RETURN
XM MEMORY
• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than
one button simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, FULL may appear
in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case,
clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for
further learning.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– When the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each
other at the appropriate angle.
– When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– When the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
(U.S.A. model)
6
XM
CD
AUDIO SEL
STANDBY
DVD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
POWER
AV
TUNER
MD/TAPE
POWER
A
DVR/VCR2
TV
PHONO
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
POWER
DTV
SELECT
V-AUX
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until OK
appears in the display window.
NG appears in the display window if learning was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.
(U.S.A. model)
y
• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5
and 6.
• If you continuously want to program another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
component, then repeat steps 5 and 6.
97
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Using RE-NAME
5
You can change the name of the input source that appears
in the display window on the remote control if you want to
use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful
when you have set the input selector to control a different
component.
1
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
AMP
6
SOURCE
TV
2
Press l / h to move the cursor to the next
position.
Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to rename.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
Press ENTER to set the new name.
OK appears in the display window if renaming was
successful.
NG appears in the display window if renaming was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
y
If you continuously want to rename another component,
press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select
the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6.
7
Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming
mode.
RE-NAME
(U.S.A. model)
3
Note
Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
RE-NAME
Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press RE-NAME again.
4
Press k / n to select and enter a character.
Pressing n changes the character as follows:
A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),
/ (slash), and space.
(Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.)
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
98
ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one
button simultaneously.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Using MACRO
The MACRO feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,
when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button
to start playback. The MACRO feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button.
The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(see page 100).
Press a macro button
CD
To automatically transmit these signals in order
POWER
CD
Macro buttons
First
Second
Third
STANDBY
STANDBY
—
—
POWER
POWER
(*1)
POWER
(CD area)
(*2)
TV
A
XM
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PHONO
PHONO
TUNER
TUNER
CD
CD
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
—
V-AUX
V-AUX
—
CBL/SAT
—
CBL/SAT
—
(*3)
—
(CD area) (*4)
POWER
MD/TAPE
MD/TAPE
(MD/TAPE area) (*4)
(*1)
CD-R
DTV
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
ADVANCED
OPERATION
CD-R
(CD-R area) (*4)
—
(VCR 1 area) (*4)
(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4)
DVD
(DVD area) (*4)
*1
You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC
OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.)
*2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 94), you can turn on the power of your TV
without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.
*3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.
*4 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD
recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that
component (see page 96) or set a remote control code (see page 94).
99
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ MACRO operations
■ Programming MACRO operations
Macro buttons
(U.S.A. model)
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
A
XM
STANDBY
POWER
FREQ/RDS
AUDIO SEL
EON
MODE PTY SEEK START
SLEEP
REC
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RE–NAME
You can program your own macro and use the MACRO
feature to transmit several remote control commands in
sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote
control codes or perform learning operations before
programming the macro. We do not recommend
programming continuous operations such as volume
control in a macro.
Notes
MACRO ON/OFF
1
Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.
2
Press a macro button.
MACRO
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.
1
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
AMP
Notes
• When you have finished using the MACRO feature, set
MACRO ON/OFF to OFF.
• While the remote is carrying out a MACRO program, it will not
accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is
complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing).
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.
SOURCE
TV
2
Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window.
MACRO
Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.
3
Press the macro button you want to use to
operate the macro.
The macro button name (ex. M;DVD) and the
selected component name (ex. DVD) appear
alternately in the display window.
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
(U.S.A. model)
Note
AGAIN appears in the display window if you press a button
other than a macro button.
100
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
4
Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, FULL appears and the remote
control automatically exits the macro mode.
(U.S.A. model)
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
TV
AV
A
XM
PHONO
TUNER
CD
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
2
Using CLEAR
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and
setup remote control codes.
■ Basic CLEAR operations
1
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
MCR 2: AV POWER
AMP
MCR 3: AUDIO SEL
SOURCE
3 MULTI CH IN
TV
MCR 1: DVD
1
2
Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
CLEAR appears in the display window.
Indicates the
number of macro
steps entered
CLEAR
Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press CLEAR again.
Flashes alternately so you can
set the next step
3
Note
L;CD
Note
Note
ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
The name of a component is shown after a semicolon (;).
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost
in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet for more than one week.
4
Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
WAIT appears in the display window. If clearing was
successful, C;OK appears in the display window.
CLEAR
y
Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the
button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer
setting, if you have set remote control codes).
Note
L;ALL and FCTRY may take about 30 seconds to complete.
101
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Press MACRO again when the operation
sequence you want to program is complete.
Clears all learned functions in the respective
component control area. Press an input selector
button to select the component.
L;AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control
area.
L;ALL Clears all learned functions.
M;ALL Clears all programmed macros.
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote
to the factory settings.
To change the selected source component, press
SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will
program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes
the selected component and corresponding component control
area.
5
Press k / n to select the clear mode.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
5
Release the object used to press CLEAR to
exit from the clearing mode.
4
CLEAR
Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object and then press the button
you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
C;OK appears in the display window if clearing was
successful.
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
FREQ/RDS
• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3.
• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one
button simultaneously.
EON
MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RE–NAME
■ Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned for a certain button in
each control area.
1
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 4.
• If you continuously want to clear another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
component, then repeat step 4.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2
Press an input selector button to select the
source component containing the function
you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
(U.S.A. model)
3
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
LEARN and the selected component name
(ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window.
LEARN
Notes
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote
control code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
102
5
Release the object used to press CLEAR to
exit the clearing mode.
The remote control returns to the learning mode.
6
Press LEARN again to exit.
Notes
• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one
button simultaneously.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Clearing a macro function
You can clear the function programmed for a certain
macro button.
1
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2
Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window.
MACRO
Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.
3
Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the macro
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
C;OK appears in the display window if clearing was
successful.
(U.S.A. model)
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
REC
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RE–NAME
ADVANCED
OPERATION
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 3.
• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you
have set remote control codes).
4
Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.
The remote control returns to the macro
programming mode.
5
Press MACRO again to exit.
Notes
• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one
button simultaneously.
103
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit
to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control
this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.
Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third
room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.
Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.
• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second
and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).
• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.
y
• You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit.
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not
need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.
REMOTE
REMOTE
IN
Infrared signal
receiver
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
OUT
YAMAHA
component
YAMAHA
component
This unit
REMOTE
IN
■ Using the external amplifiers
To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select EXT in ZONE2 AMP (see page 87).
ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT
ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT
SP OUT
Amplifier
Amplifier
MONITOR OUT
DVD player
(or other component)
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
This unit
MAIN
SYSTEM
Remote control
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Infrared signal
receiver
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
Infrared emitter
Main room
REMOTE OUT
Second room
Third room
REMOTE IN
REMOTE IN
Notes
• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the
amplifier in the second/third room.
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
• The REMOTE IN jack can be used for either Zone 2 or Zone 3 but cannot be used for both Zone 2 and Zone 3 at the same time.
104
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit
If you want to use one internal amplifier (surround or surround back) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) or PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker
terminals and select either SUR or PRNS for ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP (see pages 87 and 88).
If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both surround and surround back) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) and PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker
terminals and select BOTH for ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP (see pages 87 and 88).
SURROUND/ZONE 2(3)
R
+
–
–
+
L
R
L
+
R
+
–
–
+
L
–
PRESENCE/ ZONE 2(3)
Third room
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK
Second room
This unit
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) or PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a
Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.
Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3
You can select the zone you want to control by using the
control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.
Once the zone you want to control is selected, you can
control the selected zone as described in “Controlling
Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 106.
1
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF
or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel to
individually turn on this unit, Zone 2 or Zone
3.
Press each button repeatedly to turn on the respective
zone or set it to the standby mode.
Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select the zone you want to
control.
ZONE CONTROL
Each time you press ZONE CONTROL, the front
panel display changes as shown below, and the
indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for
approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator
flashes when this unit is selected.
ZONE2
ZONE3
No indicator flashes when this unit is selected.
ZONE ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
y
Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed
inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER and
STANDBY on the remote control to turn on this unit, Zone
2 and Zone 3 simultaneously.
ZONE2
Controls the Zone 2 component connected to the
ZONE 2 AUDIO L/R jacks on the rear panel of this
unit.
ZONE3
Controls the Zone 3 component connected to the
ZONE 3 AUDIO L/R jacks on the rear panel of this
unit.
105
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Front panel operations
2
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
y
• You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the
selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,
the currently selected zone mode is automatically
canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROL again.
• The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3
are turned on.
3
Proceed to “Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3”
on page 106 for detailed information on the
Zone 2 and Zone 3 control functions.
■ Remote control operations
1
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV on the remote control
to AMP.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2
Press SELECT k repeatedly to select the
zone you want to control.
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 is displayed in the display
window.
Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3
Once the zone you want to control is selected as described
in “Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 105, you can
control Zone 2 and Zone 3 by using the control buttons on
the front panel or on the remote control. The available
operations are listed as follows:
• Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3
• Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3
• Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3
• Tuning into FM or AM when TUNER is selected as the
input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3
• Tuning into the XM Satellite Radio when XM is
selected as the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3
■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Use the INPUT selector on the front panel (or
press one of the input selector buttons on the
remote control) to select the input source of the
selected zone.
If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2:
name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the
selected input source” is displayed in the display window
when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected respectively.
(U.S.A. model)
A
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
INPUT
SELECT
or
or
3
Proceed to “Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3”
for detailed information on the Zone 2 and
Zone 3 control functions.
4
Press SELECT k / n to exit from the
Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.
Notes
• The input source of Zone 2 and the source available for
recording are always the same.
• ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 appears in the display window only
when k is pressed, and ALL appears only when n is
pressed.
106
• Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER
features in the selected zone. For details about the
TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on
page 46.
• Select XM as the input source to use the XM Satellite
Radio features in the selected zone. For details about
the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM®
SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 52.
Note
The selected input source is shared across all zones.
y
You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected
zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently
selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press
ZONE CONTROL on the front panel again.
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME
+/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume level of the
selected zone.
Control range: –80 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
VOLUME
+
or
VOLUME
–
Note
Using the control mode of Zone 2
and Zone 3
POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work
differently depending on the selected zone that appears in
the display window.
• When the normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected,
you can turn on this unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them
to the standby mode individually.
• When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns
on this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously and
pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode
simultaneously.
Control mode
VOLUME +/– can be used only when ZONE2 VOL or ZONE3
VOL is set to VAR in ZONE SET (see page 87).
LCD display
POWER
and
STANDBY
Normal mode
Name of component
Turns on the main
unit only or sets it to
the standby mode.
■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Zone 2 mode
“ZONE 2” or “2:name
of the selected
component”
Turns on Zone 2 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
Press CH +/– and TV VOL +/– on the remote control to
adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) and the
low-frequency response (BASS) respectively.
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB
Control step: 2 dB
Zone 3 mode
“ZONE 3” or “3:name
of the selected
component”
Turns on Zone 3 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
“ALL”
POWER: turns on
the main unit, Zone 2
and Zone 3.
STANDBY: sets the
main unit, Zone 2
and Zone 3 to the
standby mode.
y
Press MUTE to mute the sound output to the selected zone.
All mode
+
+
CH
TV VOL
–
–
Note
Note
In the normal mode, MAIN appears for a few seconds when
POWER or STANDBY is pressed.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display
window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality
of the corresponding zone (see page 106).
y
You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using
TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting
the tonal quality” on page 38.
107
HDMI
HDMI
What is HDMI?
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/
video) interface.
Providing an interface between any A/V source (such as a
set-top box or A/V receiver) and an audio/video monitor
(such as a digital television – DTV), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as
multi-channel digital audio using a single cable.
HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports
8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure
audio/video interface that meets the security requirements
of content providers and system operators.
For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website
at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following
standards:
• HDMI 1.1 (High-Definition Multimedia Interface
Specification Version 1.1) licensed by HDMI
Licensing, LLC.
• HDCP 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital
Content Protection, LLC.
• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
• This unit is not compatible with multi-stereo area audio signals
of Super Audio CDs. You can connect devices (such as a DVD
player) to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
• When connected to a DVD player, audio signals may not be
output depending on the type of the DVD player. In case the
DVD player connected to this unit does not output DVD multichannel audio signals at the HDMI OUT jack, connect the DVD
player to the analog multi-channel audio input jacks.
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio plays back, video and
audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the
DVD player.
• Video and audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2
jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is
set to the standby mode or the power is turned off.
• When connecting other HDMI components to this unit, refer to
the instruction manuals for those components.
• When HDMI audio signals are output from components like a
DVD player, the audio signal format (such as sampling
frequencies) may be restricted depending on the HDMI video
signal format.
• Do not disconnect or connect the HDMI cable from this unit or
turn off the power of the HDMI/DVI components connected to
the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred.
Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise.
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI
connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio signals being
input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI
indicator flashes irregularly and HDCP ERROR appears in the
front panel display as if the DVI monitors do not support the
HDCP copy protection standards.
■ HDMI compatibility with this unit
Notes
• Analog audio signals input at the audio input jacks other than
the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the
HDMI OUT jack. However, analog video signals input at the
composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be
up-converted to HDMI so that the digitally up-converted video
signals can be output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 86).
• Connect the HDMI OUT jack of other components (such as a
DVD player) to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit.
Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 jack of other components (such as a projector).
• You need a commercially available HDMI cable to connect this
unit to other HDMI components. Use an HDMI cable shorter
than 5 m (15 ft) to ensure stable operations and to prevent losses
of video quality.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2
jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.
108
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
HDMI
components
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, etc.
Bitstream
Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
HDMI
Setting the HDMI parameters
■ Assigning HDMI components
You can assign an HDMI component to the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 jack on the rear panel of this unit so that the
audio and video signals input via HDMI connection can
be simultaneously played back.
Use the HDMI IN parameter in INPUT MENU to assign
HDMI components (see page 83).
■ Converting analog video signals to
HDMI
Basic HDMI operations
Perform the following steps to listen to playback from an
HDMI component.
Note
If an error message appears in the front panel display,
see page 116 for a complete list of error messages and proper
remedies.
1
This unit is equipped with the HDMI interlace/progressive
up-conversion feature where the analog video signals
input at the composite video, S-video and component
video jacks on the rear panel of this unit are digitally
processed and up-converted so that they can be output at
the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit with alldigital resolution quality.
Use the HDMI I/P parameter in OPTION MENU to
convert analog component video signals to HDMI
(see page 86).
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the input source
assigned to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack
on the rear panel of this unit.
(U.S.A. model)
XM
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
INPUT
or
Note
When the analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution
are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the
picture quality may worsen.
A
Front panel
2
■ Setting the HDMI support audio
You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this
unit or on another HDMI component connected to the
HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.
Use the HDMI SET parameter in SOUND MENU to set
the HDMI support audio (see page 82).
Remote control
Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel or
AUDIO SEL on the remote control repeatedly
to select AUTO or HDMI as the input mode.
The following front panel displays are examples
where DVD is selected as the input source.
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO SELECT
Front panel
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
INPUT:
A.SEL:
SP
A
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
DVD
AUTO
PHONO
TUNER
XM
dB
VOLUME
L
R
or
V-AUX
SP
A
3
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV
INPUT:
A.SEL:
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVD
HDMI
CD
PHONO
TUNER
XM
dB
VOLUME
L
R
Start playback on the connected HDMI
component.
109
ADVANCED
OPERATION
V-AUX
Remote control
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
Problem
This unit fails to turn
on when MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF on the front
panel (or POWER on
the remote control) is
pressed, or enters in
the standby mode
soon after the power
has been turned on.
No sound
No picture
Cause
See
page
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
The impedance setting is incorrect.
Set the impedance to match your speakers.
31
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
15
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity).
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use
it normally.
—
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
20–28
The optimizer microphone is connected.
Disconnect the optimizer microphone.
The input mode is set to HDMI, COAX/
OPT or ANALOG.
Set the input mode to AUTO.
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,
MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons on
the remote control.
36
Speaker connections are not secure.
Secure the connections.
15
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers by pressing
SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or by pressing
SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control).
36
The volume is turned down.
Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
38
The input mode is set to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS
signal.
Set the input mode to AUTO or COAX/OPT.
The signals this unit cannot reproduce (a
CD-ROM, for example) are being
received from a source component.
Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
—
SUPPORT AUDIO is set to OTHER and
HDMI audio signals are not being played
back on this unit.
Set SUPPORT AUDIO to RX-V1600 in MANUAL
SETUP.
82
V CONV. is set to OFF.
Set V CONV. to ON.
85
Video signals in the progressive format or
HDTV video signals are being input.
The signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 jack are being output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
110
Remedy
—
—
43
43
—
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
The sound suddenly
goes off.
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
Cause
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Remedy
See
page
Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.
31
Check the speaker wires are not touching each other
and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned the unit off.
Turn on the power, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE to cancel a mute.
38
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
20
Incorrect balance settings in the OSD
menu.
Adjust the SP LEVEL settings.
80
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound from the
effect speakers
The sound field programs are turned off.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on.
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
CENTER SP is set to NONE in
SPEAKER SET.
Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
7ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
The output level of the surround speakers
is set to minimum.
Raise the output level of the surround speakers.
SUR. L/R SP is set to NONE in
SPEAKER SET.
Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and
right speakers.
78
A monaural or stereo source is being
played with STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound
fields.
—
Presence speakers are selected.
Select SB in PRIORITY.
79
SUR. L/R SP is set to NONE in
SPEAKER SET.
If the surround left and right speakers are set to
NONE, surround back speakers are automatically set
to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the
surround left and right speakers.
78
SB L/R SP is set to NONE in SPEAKER
SET.
Select SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1 or LRGx2.
LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT when a
Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being
played.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
LFE/BASS OUT is set to SWFR or
FRONT when a 2-channel source is being
played.
Select BOTH.
No sound from the
center speaker
No sound from the
surround speakers
No sound from the
surround back
speakers
36
80
78
36
80
79
78
78
The source does not contain low bass
signals.
111
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
No sound from the
subwoofer
42
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operations
instructions for your component.
The input mode is set to ANALOG.
Set the input mode to AUTO or COAX/OPT.
A humming sound
can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
27
The volume level is
low while playing a
record.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
The turntable should be connected to this unit through
an MC-head amplifier.
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to this
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT jacks.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
MEMORY GUARD is set to ON.
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and
then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
CHECK SP WIRES
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short circuited.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
There is noise
interference from
digital or radiofrequency equipment,
or this unit.
This unit is too close to the digital or
radio-frequency equipment.
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
112
—
43
27
—
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
20–27
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
20–27
Select OFF.
86
—
15
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and
then turn it back on.
—
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Tuner
Problem
Cause
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
FM
AM
Remedy
See
page
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
29
Use the manual tuning method.
47
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multipath interference.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is too weak.
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
47
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats and other electrical
equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
—
29
47
47
—
—
■ XM Satellite Radio
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
Status message
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna
accessory is not connected, or does not
work properly.
Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna
accessory connections.
52
UPDATING
The XM user encryption code is being
updated.
Wait until the encryption code is updated.
—
NO SIGNAL
The signal is too weak.
Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna
accessory connections and orient it for the best
reception.
52
LOADING
It takes longer than four seconds for audio
or text data to be decoded.
Wait until the decoding process has finished.
—
OFF AIR
The XM Satellite Radio channel you
selected is not currently broadcasting any
signal.
Check the channel number again or select another
XM Satellite Radio channel.
56
<XM> - - -
The channel Station ID (SID) is no longer
available.
--- / ---
No artist name/feature or song/program
title is available.
<CAT> - - -
No channels are available for the selected
category.
Select another channel category by pressing
CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote
control) repeatedly.
56
113
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
CHECK ANTENNA
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Remote control
Problem
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle.
114
See
page
The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel.
5
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
4
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly.
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.
When operating the component selected by the input
selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.
When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO
area, set it to the TV position.
—
Set the remote control code correctly using
“LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end
of this manual.
94
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
94
The remote control code was not correctly
set.
The remote control
does not learn new
functions.
Remedy
Cause
—
The library code of the remote control and
the remote control ID of this unit do not
match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit with the
corresponding remote control library code.
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
Memory capacity is full.
Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
91, 94
96
4
96
—
101
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ AUTO SETUP
Before AUTO SETUP
Error message
Cause
Remedy
See
page
Connect MIC!
Optimizer microphone is not connected.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
32
Unplug HP!
Headphones are connected.
Unplug the headphones.
—
During AUTO SETUP
Error message
E-1:NO FRONT SP
Cause
Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not
detected.
Remedy
See
page
Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B.
—
Check the front L/R speaker connections.
15
E-2:NO SURR.SP
A surround channel signal is not detected.
Check the surround speaker connections.
15
E-3:NO PRNS SP
A presence channel signal is not detected.
Check the presence speaker connections.
15
E-4:SBR->SBL
Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.
Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT
SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you
only have one surround back speaker.
15
Try running AUTO SETUP in a quiet environment.
—
E-5:NOISY
Background noise is too loud.
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners
or move them away from the optimizer microphone.
—
E-6:CHECK SUR.
Surround back speaker(s) is (are)
connected, though surround L/R speakers
are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use (a)
surround back speaker(s).
15
E-7:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the AUTO SETUP procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
32
The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.
Check the microphone setting.
32
E-8:NO SIGNAL
Check the speaker connections and placement.
15
E-9:USER CANCEL
The AUTO SETUP procedure was
cancelled due to user activity.
Run AUTO SETUP again.
32
E-10:INTERNAL
ERROR
An internal error occurred.
Run AUTO SETUP again.
32
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
115
TROUBLESHOOTING
After AUTO SETUP
Warning message
Cause
Remedy
See
page
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections for proper polarity
(+ or –).
15
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.
—
Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers
are set in locations with similar conditions.
—
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive. (No level correction
is made.)
Check the speaker connections.
15
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.
33
Notes
•
•
•
•
If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the AUTO SETUP procedure again.
If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made.
If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.
■ HDMI
Error message
Cause
Remedy
See
page
DEVICE OVER
More than 5 HDMI components including
this unit are connected.
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI
components.
—
HDCP ERROR
HDCP testing failed.
Check that the connected HDMI components support
the HDCP copy protection standards.
—
116
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY
Audio information
■ ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes
the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to
provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you
set up your home theater system using all eight speaker
outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround
Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close
together facing the front of the room will provide the
largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to
place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to
go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that
most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which
will re-optimized the surround sound-field.
ASA is used in three new modes: THX Select2 Cinema,
THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. It
provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels
(left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels.
An additional channel especially for bass effects, called
LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the
system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to
minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range
channels and the precise sound orientation generated
using digital sound processing provide listeners with a
previously unheard of excitement and realism.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. 96 refers to
a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate). 24 refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original
96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with
full-quality full-motion video for music programs and
motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically,
left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus
an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that
enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround
back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.
■ ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering
studios.
■ Dolby Pro Logic x
■ LFE 0.1 channel
Dolby Pro Logic x is a new technology enabling 6.1 or
7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a
Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games.
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
117
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using
a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital
EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with
Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel,
you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving
sound especially with scenes that have flyover and flyaround effects.
■ Dolby Surround
GLOSSARY
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for
6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation comparable to
digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available;
Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode
for movies.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code
modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
■ THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies
established by the world-renowned film production
company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’
personal desire to make your experience of the film
soundtrack, in both movie theaters and in your home
theater, as faithful as possible to what the director
intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters
called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back
in movie theaters with similar equipment and conditions.
This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto
Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for
playback in a small home theater environment.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to
accurately translate the sound from the movie theater
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and
spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX
indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in
Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
118
Adaptive decorrelation
In a movie theater, a large number of surround speakers
help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but
in a home theater there are usually only two speakers. This
can make the surround speakers sound like headphones
that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround
sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you
move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time
and phase relationship with respect to the other surround
channel. This expands the listening position and
creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious
surround experience as in a movie theater.
Re-equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively
bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment
in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be
played back in large movie theaters using very different
professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the
correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a
small home environment.
Timbre matching
The human ear changes our perception of sound
depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a
movie theater, there is an array of surround speakers so
that the surround information is all around you. In a home
theater, you use only two speakers located to the side of
your head. The timbre matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they
more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound
coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless
panning between the front and surround speakers.
GLOSSARY
Video information
Sound field program information
■ Component video signal
■ CINEMA DSP
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the
PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. A monitor with
component input jacks is required in order to use the
component signal for output.
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed
for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and
audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room
of your own home.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;
color, luminance and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects without any surround speakers by using
virtual surround speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
119
GLOSSARY
Parametric equalizer information
This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the
Parametric EQ settings (see page 81), to optimize the
frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to
match your listening environment. YPAO uses a
combination of the following three parameters
(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise
adjustment of the frequency characteristics.
■ Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as
the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the
values 0.5 and 10.
■ Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave
increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz.
YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your
listening requirements using a combination of the above
three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each
equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit
has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).
This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as
in Figure 1).
Figure 1
■ Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB
between –20 and +6 dB.
Gain
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Band 1
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic
Figure 2
Gain
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Band 1
Frequency
Band 2
120
Original frequency
characteristic
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 120 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 155/195/250/330 W
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω .........................................................170 W
• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................170 W
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω ..................................................................................... 1.03 dB
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................125 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω .................................................. 140 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more
• Output Level/Output Impedance
OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω
SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT
[U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models]
................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R ............................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................3.5 kHz
• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................450 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................1.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) ...........12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type (Gray Back)
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC
[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .......................... NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Maximum Input Level (V CONV. off) ................. 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (V CONV. off) ....................... 60 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component (V CONV. off) ................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB
• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to OUT (REC)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3%
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD, etc.
(5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)
Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB
• Frequency Response
Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
121
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ..................... 81 dB or more
[Other models] ........................................................ 86 dB or more
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General and Asia model]
....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA
[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less
[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less
[Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]
6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W
• AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)
[Asia, General and China models] ....... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[Australia and U.K. models] .... 1 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 435 x 171 x 438 mm
(17.1 x 6.7 x 17.2 in)
• Weight .................................................................. 17.4 kg (38.4 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
122
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
CABLE
ABC
0030, 0035
AMERICAST 0926
BELL SOUTH 0926
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
0303
BRITISH TELECOM 0030
CABLE & WIRELESS
1095
DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
DIRECTOR
0503
FILMNET
0470
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837,
GOLDSTAR 0171
HAMLIN
0036, 0300
JERROLD
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837
LG
0171
MNET
0470
MEMOREX
0027
MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,
1133
NTL
1095
NOOS
0844
ONO
1095
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
0030
PACE
0264, 1087, 1095
PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134
PARAGON
0027
PHILIPS
0332, 0344
PIONEER
0171, 0560, 0904,
1904
PULSAR
0027
QUASAR
0027
REGAL
0300, 0306
RUNCO
0027
SAGEM
0844
SAMSUNG
0027, 0171
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
SONY
1033
STARCOM
0030
SUPERCABLE
0303
TS
0030
TELE+1
0470
TELEWEST
1095
TORX
0030
TOSHIBA
0027
TRANS PX
0303
UNITED CABLE
0030
ZENITH
0027, 0552, 0926
CD PLAYER
AIWA
0184
ARCAM
0184
AUDIO RESEARCH 0184
AUDIO TON 0184
AUDIOLAB
0184
AUDIOMECA 0184
CAIRN
0184
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
0056
CARVER
0184, 0206
CYRUS
0184
DKK
0027
DMX ELECTRONICS
0184
DENON
0900
DYNAMIC BASS
0206
EMERSON
0332
FISHER
0206
GENEXXA
0059, 0332
GOODMANS 0332
GRUNDIG
0184
HARMAN/KARDON
0184, 0200
HITACHI
0059
JVC
0099
KENWOOD
0055, 0064
KRELL
0184
LXI
0332
LINN
0184
MCS
0056
MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332
MARANTZ
0056, 0184
MATSUI
0184
MEMOREX
0332
MERIDIAN
0184
MICROMEGA 0184
MIRO
0027
MISSION
0184
MYRYAD
0184
NAD
0027
NSM
0184
NAIM
0184
OPTIMUS
0027, 0059, 0064,
0206, 0332
PANASONIC 0056
PHILIPS
0184
PIONEER
0059, 0332
POLK AUDIO 0184
PROTON
0184
QED
0184
QUAD
0184
QUASAR
0056
RCA
0059, 0206, 0332
REALISTIC
0206
REVOX
0184
ROTEL
0184
SAE
0184
SANSUI
0184, 0332
SANYO
0206
SCOTT
0332
SEARS
0332
SHARP
0064
SIMAUDIO
0184
SONIC FRONTIERS 0184
SONY
0027
SYMPHONIC 0332
TAG MCLAREN
0184
TANDY
0059
TECHNICS
0056
THORENS
0184
THULE
0184
UNIVERSUM 0184
VICTOR
0099
WARDS
0184
YAMAHA
2300, 2301
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD
MARANTZ
PHILIPS
YAMAHA
0653
0653
0653
2400
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
0757
ALBA
0744
AMSTRAD
0740
APEX DIGITAL
0699, 0744,
0782, 0821, 0823,
0857, 1127
BLAUPINKT 0744
BLUE PARADE
0598
BUSH
0740
CENTREX
0699
CLATRONIC 0815
CYBERHOME 0741
DVD2000
0548
DAEWOO
0811, 0797
DANSAI
0797
DECCA
0797
DENON
0517
DIAMOND
0795
DIGITREX
0699
EMERSON
0618
ENTERPRISE 0618
FISHER
0697
GE
0549, 0744
GO VIDEO
0742
GOLDSTAR 0768
GRADIENTE 0678
GREENHILL 0744
GRUNDIG
0566
HITACHI
0600, 0691
HITEKER
0699
JVC
0585, 0650
KLH
0744
KENWOOD
0517, 0561
KOSS
0678
LG
0768
LIMIT
0795
MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702
MARANTZ
0566
MEMOREX
0858
MICO
0750
MICROSOFT 0549
MINTEK
0744
MITSUBISHI 0548
MUSTEK
0757
NESA
0744
ONKYO
0530
ORITRON
0678
PALSONIC
0699
PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389
PHILIPS
0530, 0566, 0673,
0881
PIONEER
0552, 0598, 0658,
0659
POLK AUDIO 0566
PROSCAN
0549
QWESTAR
0678
RCA
0549, 0598, 0744
ROTEL
0650
SM ELECTRONIC 0757
SAMSUNG
0600
SANYO
0697
SHARP
0657
SHERWOOD 0797
SHINSONIC 0560
SLIM ART
0811
SONY
0560, 0891
SYLVANIA
0702
TATUNG
0797
TEAC
0598, 0744
TECHNICS
0517
THETA DIGITAL
0598
THOMSON
0549
TOSHIBA
0530
URBAN CONCEPTS 0530
XBOX
0549
YAMAHA
0517, 0566, 0572,
2100, 2101, 2102
ZENITH
0530, 0618, 0768
ZEUS
0811
DVD RECORDER
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
SHARP
SONY
TOSHIBA
VICTOR
YAMAHA
2800, 2801, 2802
2808
2804, 2805, 2806
2812, 2813
2809, 2810, 2811
2803
2814
2807
LD PLAYER
CARVER
DENON
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
NAD
NAGSMI
OPTIMUS
PHILIPS
PIONEER
SALORA
SONY
TELEFUNKEN
YAMAHA
0091
0086
0091
0086
0086
0086
0086
0091
0086
0091
0228
0086
2200
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD
ONKYO
SHARP
SONY
YAMAHA
0708
0895
0888
0517
2500, 2501, 2502
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC
AIWA
0558
0185, 1116, 1415,
1432, 1668
ALCO
1417
ANAM
1636
APEX DIGITAL
1284
AUDIOLAB
1216
AUDIOTRONIC
1216
AUDIOVOX 1417
BOSE
1256
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
1397
i
CAPETRONIC 0558
CARVER
1116, 1216
CENTREX
1284
DENON
1387
FERGUSON 0558
FINE ARTS
1216
GRUNDIG
1216
HARMAN/KARDON
0137, 1331
INTEGRA
0162, 1325
JBL
0137, 1333
JVC
0101, 0558, 1401,
1522
KLH
1417, 1439
KENWOOD
1054, 1340
MCS
0066
MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,
1296,
MARANTZ
0066, 1116, 1216,
1316
MICROMEGA 1216
MUSICMAGIC
1116
MYRYAD
1216
NAD
0347
NORCENT
1416
ONKYO
0162, 0869, 1325
OPTIMUS
0558, 1050
PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,
1790
PHILIPS
1116, 1216, 1293,
1295, 1296, 1310,
1316
PIONEER
0041, 0558, 1050,
1411
POLK AUDIO 1316
PROSCAN
1281
QUASAR
0066
RCA
0558, 1050, 1281,
1417, 1636,
SABA
0558
SANSUI
1116
SCHNEIDER 0558
SONY
0185, 1085, 1185,
1685, 1785
STEREOPHONICS 1050
SUNFIRE
1340
TEAC
1417
TECHNICS
0066, 1335, 1336,
1545
TELEFUNKEN
0558
THOMSON
1281
THORENS
1216
UHER
0558
VENTURER
1417
VICTOR
0101
WARDS
0041, 0185
YAMAHA
0203, 1203, 1358,
2600, 2601, 2602,
2603, 2604, 2605
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT
ABSAT
ALBA
ALPHASTAR
AMSTRAD
ASTON
ASTRO
ATSAT
AVALON
ii
1327
0150
0482
0799
0874
0169, 1156
0200
1327
0423
BLAUPUNKT 0200
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
0874, 1202
CANAL DIGITAL
0880
CANAL SATELLITE 0880
CANAL+
0880
CHAPARRAL 0243
CITYCOM
1203
CONNEXIONS
0423
CROSSDIGITAL
1136
CYRUS
0227
D-BOX
0750, 1154
DMT
1102
DNT
0227, 0423
DAERYUNG 0423
DAEWOO
1323
DIGENIUS
0326
DIRECTV
0274, 0419, 0593,
0666, 0751, 0776,
0846, 1103, 1136,
1169, 1776, 1883
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
0802, 1032
DISHPRO
0802, 1032
DISTRATEL 0111
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
1264
ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,
0802, 0880, 0898,
1032, 1113
ENGEL
1044
EXPRESSVU 0802
FTE
0890
FINLUX
0482
FRACARRO 0898
FUBA
0423
GE
0593
GOI
0802
GALAXIS
0890, 1138
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0896
GOLD BOX
0880
GRUNDIG
0200, 0874
HTS
0802
HIRSCHMANN
0200, 0423
HITACHI
0482, 0846
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
0776, 1169, 1776
HUMAX
0890, 1203
INVIDEO
0898
JVC
0802
KATHREIN
0150, 0200, 0227,
0276, 0685, 1248
KREISELMEYER
0200
LABGEAR
1323
LOGIX
1044
LORENZEN 0326
MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751
MANHATTAN
0482, 1044,
1110
MARANTZ
0227
MEDIASAT
0880
MEMOREX
0751
METRONIC
0111
MITSUBISHI 0776
MOTOROLA 0896
MYRYAD
0227
NEXT LEVEL 0896
NOKIA
0482, 0750, 0778,
1154, 1250, 1750
OCTALTV
1032
ORBITECH
PACE
1127
0482, 0874, 1202,
1350
PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,
1347
PANDA
0482
PAYSAT
0751
PHILIPS
0160, 0227, 0482,
0749, 0751, 0776,
0880, 1103, 1169,
1776
PIONEER
0880
PROMAX
0482
PROSCAN
0419, 0593
RCA
0170, 0419, 0593,
0882
RFT
0227
RADIOSHACK
0896
RADIOLA
0227
RADIX
0423
SKY
0874, 0883, 1202
SM ELECTRONIC 1227
SABRE
0482
SAGEM
0847, 1141, 1280
SAMSUNG
1044, 1136, 1303,
1319
SAT CONTROL
1327
SATSTATION 1110
SCHWAIGER 1138
SEEMANN
0423
SIEMENS
0200
SONY
0666, 0874, 1666
STAR CHOICE
0896
STRONG
1327
TPS
0847, 1280
TANTEC
0482
TECHNISAT 1126, 1127
TELESTAR
1127
THOMSON
0482, 0880, 1073,
1318
TOPFIELD
1233
TOSHIBA
0776, 0817, 1776
ULTIMATETV
0419, 0666
UNIDEN
0749, 0751
UNIVERSUM 0200
VENTANA
0227
WISI
0200, 0423, 0482
XSAT
0150
ZEHNDER
1102
ZENITH
0883, 1883
TAPE DECK
AIWA
0056
CARVER
0056
GRUNDIG
0056
HARMAN/KARDON
0056
MAGNAVOX 0056
MARANTZ
0056
MYRYAD
0056
OPTIMUS
0054
PHILIPS
0056
PIONEER
0054
POLK AUDIO 0056
RCA
0054
REVOX
0056
SANSUI
0056
SONY
0270
THORENS
0056
WARDS
0054
YAMAHA
2700,2701
TV
AGB
AOC
0543
0036, 0057, 0087,
0119, 0120, 0135,
0205, 0207, 0478
ASA
0131
AWA
0036
ACURA
0036
ADDISON
0119, 0135, 0680
ADMIRAL
0120, 0190, 0490
ADVENT
0788
AIKO
0119
AKAI
0036, 0057, 0235,
0388, 0543, 0729,
0839
AKURA
0291
ALBA
0036, 0064, 0398,
0695
AMERICA ACTION 0207
AMPRO
0778
AMSTRAD
0036, 0064, 0198,
0398, 0439, 0460,
0543
ANAM
0036, 0207, 0277
ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677
ANITECH
0036
APEX DIGITAL
0775, 0792,
0794
AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136
BANG & OLUFSEN 0592
BASIC
0036
BAUR
0064, 0388, 0539
BAYSONIC
0207
BEAUMARK 0205
BEKO
0397, 0513, 0741,
0742
BELL & HOWELL 0181
BEON
0064
BLAUPUNKT 0222
BLUE SKY
0695, 1064
BONDSTEC 0274
BRADFORD 0207
BRANDT
0136, 0362
BROKSONIC 0263, 0490
BUSH
0036, 0064, 0398,
0401, 0695, 1064
CCE
0064
CGE
0274
CTC
0274
CXC
0207
CANDLE
0057
CARNIVALE 0057
CARVER
0081, 0197
CASCADE
0036
CATHAY
0064
CELEBRITY 0027
CELERA
0792
CENTURION 0064
CHANGHONG
0792
CHING TAI
0036, 0119
CHUN YUN
0027, 0036, 0119,
0207
CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207
CIMLINE
0036
CINERAL
0119, 0478
CITIZEN
0057, 0087, 0119
CLARION
0207
CLARIVOX
0064
CLATRONIC 0274, 0397
CONDOR
0347, 0397
CONRAC
0835
CONTEC
CRAIG
CROSLEY
CROWN
0036, 0207
0207
0081
0036, 0064, 0207,
0397, 0445
CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,
0081, 0087, 0120,
0172, 0181, 0193,
0478, 0729, 1174,
1374
DAEWOO
0036, 0057, 0064,
0119, 0135, 0181,
0197, 0205, 0207,
0401, 0478, 0650,
0661, 1688
DANSAI
0064
DAYTON
0036
DE GRAAF
0235, 0575
DECCA
0064, 0543
DENON
0172
DIGATRON
0064
DIXI
0036, 0064
DUMONT
0044
DWIN
0747, 0801
ECE
0064
ELBE
0286
ELECTROBAND
0027
ELIN
0064, 0575
ELITE
0347
ELTA
0036
EMERSON
0181, 0205, 0207,
0263, 0388, 0490,
0650
ENVISION
0057,0840
EPSON
0860
ERRES
0064
ETHER
0036, 0057
ETRON
0036
EUROPHON 0543
FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,
0265, 0314, 0362,
0587
FIDELITY
0388
FINLANDIA 0235, 0373
FINLUX
0064, 0131, 0132,
0373, 0543
FIRSTAR
0036, 0263
FIRSTLINE
0036, 0274, 0695
FISHER
0131, 0181, 0235,
0397
FLINT
0482
FORMENTI
0064, 0347
FORTRESS
0120
FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291
FUJITSU
0710, 0836
FUNAI
0207, 0198, 0291
FUTURETECH
0207
GE
0057, 0074, 0078,
0119, 0205, 0207,
0478, 0587, 1174,
1374, 1481
GEC
0064, 0543
GATEWAY
1782, 1783
GELOSO
0036
GENEXXA
0190
GIBRALTER 0044, 0057
GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,
0181, 0205, 0404
GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,
0661
GOREMJE
0397
GRADIENTE 0080, 0197
GRAETZ
0190, 0388
GRANADA
0064, 0235, 0366,
0543
GRANDIN
0637
GRUNDIG
0064, 0222, 0514,
0583, 0614
GRUNPY
0207
HCM
0036, 0439
HALLMARK 0205
HANKOOK
0057, 0205, 0207
HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,
0455, 0583
HANTAREX 0543
HARMAN/KARDON 0081
HARVARD
0207
HAVERMY
0120
HELLO KITTY
0478
HINARI
0036, 0064
HISAWA
0482
HITACHI
0036, 0057, 0119,
0132, 0136, 0172,
0190, 0205, 0252,
0383, 0508, 0575,
0605, 1172, 1283
HUA TUN
0036
HUANYU
0401
HYPSON
0064, 0291
ICE
0291, 0398
ITS
0398
ITT
0190, 0388, 0575
IMPERIAL
0274, 0397, 0445
INDIANA
0064
INFINITY
0081
INGELEN
0190
INNO HIT
0543
INNOVA
0064
INTEQ
0044
INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,
0388, 0539
INTERVISION
0064, 0291,
0404
JBL
0081
JCB
0027
JVC
0080, 0398, 0490,
0680, 0710
JEAN
0036, 0078, 0119,
0183, 0263
JENSEN
0788
KEC
0207
KTV
0057, 0207
KAISUI
0036
KAPSCH
0190
KARCHER
0637
KATHREIN
0583
KENDO
0064
KENWOOD
0057
KNEISSEL
0286, 0462
KOLIN
0080, 0135, 0207
KORPEL
0064
KOYODA
0036
L&S ELECTRONIC 0835
LG
0057, 0064, 0087,
0135, 0205, 0741
LXI
0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0205
LEYCO
0064, 0291
LIESENK & TTER 0064
LOEWE
0539
LUXOR
0383, 0388
M ELECTRONIC
0036, 0064,
0131, 0132, 0136,
0190, 0314, 0373,
0401, 0507
MGA
0057, 0177, 0205
MTC
0057, 0087, 0539
MAGNADYNE
0274, 0543
MAGNAFON 0543
MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,
1481
MANESTH
0291, 0347
MARANTZ
0057, 0064, 0081,
0583
MARK
0064
MATSUI
0036, 0064, 0235,
0398, 0514, 0543
MATSUSHITA
0277, 0677
MEDIATOR 0064
MEDION
0695, 0835, 1064
MEGATRON 0172, 0205
MEMOREX
0036, 0177, 0181,
0205, 0277, 0490,
1064
METZ
0474
MICROMAXX
0835
MICROSTAR 0835
MIDLAND
0044, 0074, 0078
MINERVA
0514
MINOKA
0439
MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,
0177, 0181, 0205,
0207, 0263, 0277,
0539, 0863, 1277
MIVAR
0318,0319, 0543,
0636
MOTOROLA 0120
MULTITECH 0036, 0207
MYRYAD
0583
NAD
0183, 0205, 0388,
0893
NEC
0036, 0057, 0078,
0181, 0183, 0197,
0205, 0482, 0524,
1731
NEI
0064
NTC
0119
NECKERMANN
0064, 0583
NETSAT
0064
NEWAVE
0036, 0119, 0120,
0205
NIKKAI
0064, 0291
NIKKO
0057, 0119, 0205
NOKIA
0388, 0500, 0507,
0575, 0658
NORCENT
0775, 0851
NORDMENDE
0136, 0314,
0587
OCEANIC
0190, 0388
ONWA
0207, 0460
OPTIMUS
0181, 0193, 0277,
0677
OPTONICA
0120
ORION
0064, 0263, 0347,
0490, 0543
OSAKI
0291, 0439
OTTO VERSAND
0064, 0347,
0539, 0583
PALLADIUM 0397, 0445
PANAMA
0291
PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,
0190, 0277, 0677,
1437
PATHE CINEMA
0265, 0347
PAUSA
0036
PENNEY
0057, 0074, 0078,
0087, 0183, 0205,
1374
PERDIO
0347
PHILCO
0057, 0064, 0081,
0172, 0205, 0207,
0274, 0490, 1688
PHILIPS
0027, 0057, 0064,
0078, 0081, 0119,
0135, 0205, 0401,
0583, 0717, 1481
PHONOLA
0064
PILOT
0057
PIONEER
0136, 0190, 0193,
0314, 0706, 0787,
0893
PORTLAND 0119
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0543
PRIMA
0788
PRISM
0078
PROFEX
0036, 0388
PROSCAN
0074
PROTECH
0036, 0064, 0274,
0291, 0445, 0695
PROTON
0036, 0057, 0205
PULSAR
0044
QUASAR
0078, 0277, 0677
QUELLE
0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
R-LINE
0064
RCA
0027, 0057, 0074,
0117, 0119, 0205,
0706, 1074, 1174,
1274, 1374, 1474,
1481, 1574
RFT
0455
RADIOSHACK
0057, 0074,
0181, 0205, 0207
RADIOLA
0064
RADIOMARELLI
0543
REALISTIC
0057, 0181, 0205,
0207
REDIFFUSION
0388
REOC
0741
REVOX
0064
REX
0190, 0286, 0291
ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445
RUNCO
0044, 0057, 0524,
0630
SBR
0064
SEG
0291, 0695
SEI
0543
SKY
0064
SSS
0207
SABA
0136, 0190, 0314,
0362
SACCS
0265
SAGEM
0637
SAISHO
0036, 0291, 0543
SALORA
0190, 0380, 0388,
0575
SAMBERS
0543
SAMPO
0036, 0057, 0119,
0120, 0181, 0198,
0205, 0677, 1782
SAMSUNG
0036, 0057, 0064,
0087, 0117, 0119,
0181, 0205, 0291,
0397, 0583, 0614,
0645, 0729, 0793,
0839, 0841
SANSEI
0478
SANSUI
0490
SANYO
0131, 0181, 0207,
0235, 0366, 0826
SCHAUB LORENZ 0388
SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,
0695
SCOTCH
0205
SCOTT
0205, 0207, 0263
iii
SEARS
0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0198, 0205
SELECO
0190, 0286
SEMIVOX
0207
SEMP
0183
SHARP
0057, 0120, 0677
SHEN YING 0036, 0119
SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263
SIAREM
0543
SIEMENS
0064, 0222
SINUDYNE
0543
SKANTIC
0383
SKYGIANT
0207
SKYWORTH 0064
SOLAVOX
0190
SONITRON
0235
SONOKO
0036, 0064
SONOLOR
0190, 0235
SONTEC
0064
SONY
0027, 0677, 0861,
1127, 1532, 1678
SOUNDESIGN
0205, 0207
SOUNDWAVE
0064, 0445
SOWA
0078, 0087, 0119,
0183, 0205
SQUAREVIEW
0198
STANDARD 0036
STARLITE
0207
STERN
0190, 0286
SUPREME
0027
SYLVANIA
0057, 0081, 0198
SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207
SYNCO
0027, 0087, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0478
SYSLINE
0064
T+A
0474
TCM
0835
TMK
0205
TNCI
0044
TVS
0490
TACICO
0036, 0119, 0205
TAI YI
0036
TANDY
0120, 0190
TASHIKO
0119, 0677
TATUNG
0036, 0064, 0078,
0081, 0087, 0181,
0183, 0543
TEAC
0036, 0064, 0291,
0439, 0445, 0482,
0695, 1064
TEC
0274
TECHNEMA 0347
TECHNICS
0078, 0277, 0677
TECHWOOD 0078
TECO
0036, 0078, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0291,
0680
TEKNIKA
0081, 0087, 0119,
0177, 0207
TELEFUNKEN
0136, 0289,
0362, 0652, 0729
TELEMEISTER
0347
TELETECH
0036
TENSAI
0347
TERA
0057
THOMSON
0136, 0314, 0587,
0652, 1474
THORN
0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
TOSHIBA
0087, 0181, 0183,
0535, 0645, 0677,
0859, 1283, 1383,
1683, 1731
TRIUMPH
0543
TUNTEX
0036, 0057, 0119
iv
UHER
0347
UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,
0291, 0373, 0397,
0519
VECTOR RESEARCH
0057
VESTEL
0064
VICTOR
0080, 0277, 0677,
0680
VIDEOSAT
0274
VIDIKRON
0081
VIDTECH
0205
VIEWSONIC 1782
VISION
0347
VOXSON
0190
WALTHAM
0383
WARDS
0057, 0081, 0205,
0893
WATSON
0064, 0347
WAYCON
0183
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0064, 0347, 0490,
0650
YAMAHA
0057, 0677, 0796,
0860,
2900 (projector),
2901 (projector),
2902, 2903
YAPSHE
0277
YOKO
0064, 0291
ZENITH
0044, 0119, 0205,
0490
VCR
ASA
ADMIRAL
ADVENTURA
AIKO
AIWA
0064, 0108
0075
0027
0305
0027, 0064, 0334,
0375, 0379
AKAI
0068, 0342
AKIBA
0099
ALBA
0099, 0305, 0342,
0379
AMERICA ACTION 0305
AMERICAN HIGH 0062
AMSTRAD
0027
ANAM
0064, 0253, 0267,
0305, 0507
ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589
ANITECH
0099
ASHA
0267
ASUKA
0064
AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305
BAIRD
0027, 0068, 0131
BASIC LINE 0099, 0305
BEAUMARK 0267
BELL & HOWELL 0131
BLAUPUNKT 0253
BRANDT
0347
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
0068
BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506
BUSH
0099, 0305, 0379
CCE
0099, 0305
CGE
0027
CALIX
0064
CANON
0062
CARVER
0108
CIMLINE
0099
CINERAL
0305
CITIZEN
0064, 0305, 1305
COLT
0099
COMBITECH 0379
CRAIG
0064, 0074, 0099,
0267
CROWN
0099, 0305
CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,
0087, 1062
CYBERNEX 0267
CYRUS
0108
DAEWOO
0072, 0131, 0305,
0669, 1305
DANSAI
0099
DE GRAAF
0069
DECCA
0027, 0108
DENON
0069
DUAL
0068
DUMONT
0027, 0108, 0131
DYNATECH 0027
ESC
0267, 0305
ELCATECH
0099
ELECTROHOME
0064
ELECTROPHONIC 0064
EMEREX
0059
EMERSON
0027, 0062, 0064,
0070, 0072, 0211,
0267, 0305, 1305,
1506
FERGUSON 0068, 0347
FIDELITY
0027
FINLANDIA 0108, 0131
FINLUX
0027, 0069, 0108,
0131
FIRSTLINE
0064, 0070, 0072,
0099
FISHER
0074, 0131
FUJI
0060, 0062
FUJITSU
0027, 0072
FUNAI
0027
GE
0062, 0087, 0267,
0834, 1062, 1087
GEC
0108
GARRARD
0027
GENERAL
0072
GO VIDEO
0459
GOLDHAND 0099
GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,
1264
GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,
0305
GRADIENTE 0027
GRAETZ
0068, 0131, 0267
GRANADA
0108, 0131
GRANDIN
0027, 0064, 0099
GRUNDIG
0099, 0108, 0253,
0374
HCM
0099
HI-Q
0074
HANSEATIC 0064
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0027
HARMAN/KARDON 0108
HARWOOD
0099
HINARI
0099, 0267, 0379
HITACHI
0027, 0064, 0068,
0069, 0267
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0069
HYPSON
0099
ITT
0068, 0131, 0267
ITV
0064, 0305
IMPERIAL
0027
INTERFUNK 0108
JVC
0068, 0072, 0094
JENSEN
0068
KEC
0064, 0305
KLH
0099
KAISUI
0099
KENWOOD
KODAK
KOLIN
KORPEL
LG
0068, 0094
0062, 0064
0068, 0070
0099
0064, 0069, 0072,
0507
LXI
0064
LENCO
0305
LEYCO
0099
LLOYD’S
0027
LOEWE
0064, 0108, 1589
LOGIK
0099, 0267
LUXOR
0070, 0075, 0131
M ELECTRONIC
0027
MEI
0062
MGA
0070, 0267
MGN TECHNOLOGY
0267
MTC
0027, 0267
MAGNASONIC
1305
MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,
0108, 1808
MAGNIN
0267
MANESTH
0072, 0099
MARANTZ
0062, 0108
MARTA
0064
MATSUI
0375, 0379
MATSUSHITA
0062
MEDION
0375
MEMOREX
0027, 0062, 0064,
0066, 0074, 0075,
0131, 0267, 0334,
0375, 1264
MEMPHIS
0099
METZ
0064, 0374, 1589
MINOLTA
0069
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,
0108, 0834
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075
MULTITECH 0027, 0099
MURPHY
0027
MYRYAD
0108
NAD
0131
NEC
0062, 0064, 0068,
0075, 0094, 0131
NATIONAL
0253
NECKERMANN
0108
NESCO
0099
NEWAVE
0064
NIKKO
0064
NOBLEX
0267
NOKIA
0068, 0131, 0267
NORDMENDE
0068, 0347
OCEANIC
0027, 0068
OKANO
0342, 0375
OLYMPUS
0062, 0253
OPTIMUS
0064, 0075, 0131,
0459
ORION
0211, 0375, 0379,
1506
OSAKI
0027, 0064, 0099
OTTO VERSAND
0108
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,
0643, 1062, 1589
PATHE MARCONI 0068
PENNEY
0062, 0064, 0069,
0267, 1062, 1264
PENTAX
0069
PERDIO
0027
PHILCO
0062
PHILIPS
0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA
0108
PILOT
0064
PIONEER
0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC
0267
PROLINE
0027
PROSCAN
0087, 1087
PROTEC
0099
PULSAR
0066
PYE
0108
QUASAR
0062, 1062
QUELLE
0108
RCA
0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK
0027
RADIOLA
0108
RADIX
0064
RANDEX
0064
REALISTIC
0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC
0375
REPLAYTV
0641, 0643
REX
0068
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO
0066
SBR
0108
SEG
0267
SEI
0108
STS
0069
SABA
0068, 0347
SALORA
0070
SAMPO
0064, 0075
SAMSUNG
0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY
0066, 0075
SANSUI
0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO
0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE
0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT
0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS
0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO
0068
SEMP
0072
SHARP
0075, 0834
SHINTOM
0099, 0131
SIEMENS
0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA
0064
SINGER
0072, 0099
SINUDYNE
0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC
0064
SONY
0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI
0375
SUNSTAR
0027
SUNTRONIC 0027
SYLVANIA
0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK
0267
TANDY
0027, 0131
TASHIKO
0027, 0064
TATUNG
0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC
0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS
0062, 0253
TECO
0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA
0027, 0062, 0064
TELEAVIA
0068
TELEFUNKEN
TENOSAL
TENSAI
THOMAS
THOMSON
0068, 0347
0099
0027
0027
0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN
0068, 0131
TIVO
0645, 0663
TOSHIBA
0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER
0267
UNITECH
0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR
0072
VICTOR
0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC
0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN
0027
WARDS
0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000
0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA
0068
YAMISHI
0099
YOKAN
0099
YOKO
0267
ZENITH
0027, 0060, 0066,
1506
v
RX-V1600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 26, 2005 4:34 PM
U
RX-V1600
RX-V1600
AV Receiver
© 2005
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
All rights reserved.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Printed in Malaysia
WF99900
Download PDF
Similar pages
Sony NHS-703 User's Manual
quick set up guide - Panasonic Service Network Europe
Sony NHS-301 User's Manual
CR 12 McIntosh
Setting up your Gateway 30" LCD TV 1 4 3
DCX710SL